US20230190544A1 - Absorbent article with an exudate management layer - Google Patents
Absorbent article with an exudate management layer Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20230190544A1 US20230190544A1 US18/107,144 US202318107144A US2023190544A1 US 20230190544 A1 US20230190544 A1 US 20230190544A1 US 202318107144 A US202318107144 A US 202318107144A US 2023190544 A1 US2023190544 A1 US 2023190544A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- component
- absorbent article
- various embodiments
- fibers
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 230000002745 absorbent Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 345
- 239000002250 absorbent Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 345
- 210000000416 exudates and transudate Anatomy 0.000 title claims abstract description 183
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 50
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 42
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 12
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 claims description 179
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 446
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 177
- 239000006261 foam material Substances 0.000 description 85
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 68
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 39
- -1 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 38
- 239000006260 foam Substances 0.000 description 34
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 30
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 29
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 21
- 239000002657 fibrous material Substances 0.000 description 19
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 19
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 14
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 13
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 13
- 238000010191 image analysis Methods 0.000 description 12
- 210000002414 leg Anatomy 0.000 description 12
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 12
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 11
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 10
- 230000002550 fecal effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 10
- 206010021639 Incontinence Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000004094 surface-active agent Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 239000004745 nonwoven fabric Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000004080 punching Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000004026 adhesive bonding Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000012549 training Methods 0.000 description 7
- 229920000297 Rayon Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 229920005830 Polyurethane Foam Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229920001131 Pulp (paper) Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000005012 migration Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229920000747 poly(lactic acid) Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 239000004626 polylactic acid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920000098 polyolefin Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 239000011496 polyurethane foam Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920000247 superabsorbent polymer Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229920001169 thermoplastic Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 239000004416 thermosoftening plastic Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920000742 Cotton Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000123 paper Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000002964 rayon Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920002994 synthetic fiber Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000010998 test method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000012815 thermoplastic material Substances 0.000 description 4
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 244000043261 Hevea brasiliensis Species 0.000 description 3
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 3
- HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[Na+] HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 229920002472 Starch Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000013536 elastomeric material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229920003052 natural elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920001194 natural rubber Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011122 softwood Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000008107 starch Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000019698 starch Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920003051 synthetic elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000012209 synthetic fiber Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000005061 synthetic rubber Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004804 winding Methods 0.000 description 3
- SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-methoxy-5-methylphenyl)ethanamine Chemical compound COC1=CC=C(C)C=C1CCN SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Propenoic acid Natural products OC(=O)C=C NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VTYYLEPIZMXCLO-UHFFFAOYSA-L Calcium carbonate Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-]C([O-])=O VTYYLEPIZMXCLO-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 244000025254 Cannabis sativa Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000012766 Cannabis sativa ssp. sativa var. sativa Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 235000012765 Cannabis sativa ssp. sativa var. spontanea Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 240000006240 Linum usitatissimum Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000004431 Linum usitatissimum Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920001410 Microfiber Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000021028 berry Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000009120 camo Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000009960 carding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000005607 chanvre indien Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004049 embossing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011487 hemp Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012510 hollow fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000017 hydrogel Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000003703 image analysis method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000691 measurement method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003658 microfiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920005615 natural polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 231100000344 non-irritating Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 239000002736 nonionic surfactant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920002401 polyacrylamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000002700 urine Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000080 wetting agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- NECRQCBKTGZNMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,5-dimethylhex-1-yn-3-ol Chemical compound CC(C)CC(C)(O)C#C NECRQCBKTGZNMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acetate Chemical compound CC([O-])=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 241000609240 Ambelania acida Species 0.000 description 1
- 240000008564 Boehmeria nivea Species 0.000 description 1
- 229910000975 Carbon steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920002134 Carboxymethyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001661 Chitosan Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 240000000491 Corchorus aestuans Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000011777 Corchorus aestuans Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000010862 Corchorus capsularis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920002785 Croscarmellose sodium Polymers 0.000 description 1
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000219146 Gossypium Species 0.000 description 1
- 229920002153 Hydroxypropyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000161 Locust bean gum Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000079 Memory foam Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000006057 Non-nutritive feed additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001247 Reticulated foam Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002125 Sokalan® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- QYKIQEUNHZKYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl ether Chemical class C=COC=C QYKIQEUNHZKYBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002522 Wood fibre Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000005299 abrasion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001464 adherent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002390 adhesive tape Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000615 alginic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000010443 alginic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920003231 aliphatic polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920003232 aliphatic polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000004873 anchoring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003963 antioxidant agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000010905 bagasse Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005601 base polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001217 buttock Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910000019 calcium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010962 carbon steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001768 carboxy methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010948 carboxy methyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008112 carboxymethyl-cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005266 casting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002421 cell wall Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920003020 cross-linked polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004703 cross-linked polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910003460 diamond Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010432 diamond Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002009 diols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000001493 electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005038 ethylene vinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000004392 genitalia Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011121 hardwood Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001519 homopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001477 hydrophilic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001600 hydrophobic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001863 hydroxypropyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010977 hydroxypropyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000011065 in-situ storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003999 initiator Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002655 kraft paper Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003475 lamination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004816 latex Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000126 latex Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000092 linear low density polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004707 linear low-density polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000711 locust bean gum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010420 locust bean gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000006210 lotion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008210 memory foam Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000609 methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001923 methylcellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010981 methylcellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920001206 natural gum Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000003605 opacifier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012466 permeate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002985 plastic film Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006255 plastic film Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004014 plasticizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001200 poly(ethylene-vinyl acetate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001495 poly(sodium acrylate) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004584 polyacrylic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002239 polyacrylonitrile Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006254 polymer film Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004627 regenerated cellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000036559 skin health Effects 0.000 description 1
- NNMHYFLPFNGQFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium polyacrylate Chemical compound [Na+].[O-]C(=O)C=C NNMHYFLPFNGQFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000003381 stabilizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004583 superabsorbent polymers (SAPs) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003655 tactile properties Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009864 tensile test Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001187 thermosetting polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009736 wetting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002268 wool Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000037303 wrinkles Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000230 xanthan gum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001285 xanthan gum Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000010493 xanthan gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940082509 xanthan gum Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004711 α-olefin Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F13/53743—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterised by the position of the layer relative to the other layers
- A61F13/53747—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterised by the position of the layer relative to the other layers the layer is facing the topsheet
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
- A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
- A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
- A61F13/51104—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin the top sheet having a three-dimensional cross-section, e.g. corrugations, embossments, recesses or projections
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
- A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
- A61F13/5116—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin being formed of multiple layers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F13/53708—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer the layer having a promotional function on liquid propagation in at least one direction
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F13/5376—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterised by the performance of the layer, e.g. acquisition rate, distribution time, transfer time
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B3/00—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
- B32B3/26—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
- B32B3/263—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer having non-uniform thickness
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B3/00—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
- B32B3/26—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
- B32B3/266—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by an apertured layer, the apertures going through the whole thickness of the layer, e.g. expanded metal, perforated layer, slit layer regular cells B32B3/12
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/45—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
- A61F13/47—Sanitary towels, incontinence pads or napkins
- A61F13/472—Sanitary towels, incontinence pads or napkins specially adapted for female use
- A61F13/47218—Sanitary towels, incontinence pads or napkins specially adapted for female use with a raised crotch region, e.g. hump
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
- A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
- A61F13/512—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin characterised by its apertures, e.g. perforations
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F13/53708—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer the layer having a promotional function on liquid propagation in at least one direction
- A61F13/53713—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer the layer having a promotional function on liquid propagation in at least one direction the layer having a promotional function on liquid propagation in the vertical direction
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/51—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
- A61F13/511—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
- A61F2013/51186—Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin specially shaped topsheets
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F2013/53765—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterized by its geometry
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F2013/53765—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterized by its geometry
- A61F2013/53782—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterized by its geometry with holes
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F2013/53765—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterized by its geometry
- A61F2013/53786—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer characterized by its geometry with folds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/534—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad
- A61F13/537—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer
- A61F2013/53795—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium having an inhomogeneous composition through the thickness of the pad characterised by a layer facilitating or inhibiting flow in one direction or plane, e.g. a wicking layer being a surge management layer
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F13/00—Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
- A61F13/15—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
- A61F13/53—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium
- A61F13/538—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium characterised by specific fibre orientation or weave
- A61F2013/5386—Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the absorbing medium characterised by specific fibre orientation or weave by the fibre orientation in the z plane or vertical direction
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B2555/00—Personal care
- B32B2555/02—Diapers or napkins
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B3/00—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
- B32B3/26—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
- B32B3/28—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer comprising a deformed thin sheet, i.e. the layer having its entire thickness deformed out of the plane, e.g. corrugated, crumpled
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/2419—Fold at edge
- Y10T428/24215—Acute or reverse fold of exterior component
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24273—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.] including aperture
- Y10T428/24281—Struck out portion type
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24273—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.] including aperture
- Y10T428/24322—Composite web or sheet
- Y10T428/24331—Composite web or sheet including nonapertured component
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24479—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.] including variation in thickness
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24628—Nonplanar uniform thickness material
- Y10T428/24661—Forming, or cooperating to form cells
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T428/00—Stock material or miscellaneous articles
- Y10T428/24—Structurally defined web or sheet [e.g., overall dimension, etc.]
- Y10T428/24628—Nonplanar uniform thickness material
- Y10T428/24669—Aligned or parallel nonplanarities
Definitions
- a primary function of a personal care absorbent article is to absorb and retain body exudates such as urine and fecal material with additional desired attributes including low leakage of the exudates from the absorbent article and a dry feel to the wearer of the absorbent article.
- body exudates such as urine and fecal material
- additional desired attributes including low leakage of the exudates from the absorbent article and a dry feel to the wearer of the absorbent article.
- Currently, a wide variety of products for absorbent of body exudates are available in the form of diapers, training pants, and incontinence devices. These products generally have an absorbent core positioned between a body-facing liquid permeable topsheet layer and a garment-facing liquid impermeable layer. The edges of the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer are often bonded together at their periphery to form a seal to contain the absorbent core and body exudates received into the product through the topsheet layer.
- such products may have a front waist and
- Absorbent articles commonly fail, however, to prevent leakage of body exudates.
- Some body exudates such as solid and semi-solid fecal material, have difficulty penetrating the topsheet layer of the absorbent article as easily as urine and tend to spread across the surface of the topsheet layer under the influence of gravity, motion, and pressure by the wearer of the absorbent article.
- the migration of such body exudates is often towards the perimeter of the absorbent article, increasing the likelihood of leakage and smears against the skin of the wearer which can make clean-up of the skin difficult.
- an absorbent article can have a longitudinal direction and a transverse direction; a longitudinal centerline and a transverse centerline; an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region positioned between the anterior region and the posterior region; an anterior region transverse direction end edge, a posterior region transverse direction end edge, and a pair of longitudinal direction side edges extending between and connecting the anterior region transverse direction end edge and the posterior region transverse direction end edge; a topsheet layer defining a body facing surface of the absorbent article, a liquid impermeable layer defining a garment facing surface of the absorbent article, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer; and an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer; the exudate management layer comprising a first component at least partially defining an opening in the exudate management layer; and a second component connected to the first component via a primary fold, the second component extending from the primary fold in the longitudinal direction towards the posterior region of the absorbent article, wherein the exudate
- the exudate management layer is positioned on the body facing surface of the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer is positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core.
- the absorbent article further has an acquisition layer.
- the second component comprises a secondary fold.
- the absorbent article further has a third component connected to the primary component of the exudate management layer via a third component primary fold.
- the third component extends from the third component primary fold in the longitudinal direction towards the anterior region of the absorbent article.
- the second component at least partially overlaps the first component. In various embodiments, the second component at least partially underlaps the first component.
- the absorbent article further has an opposing pair of containment flaps extending in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article.
- the topsheet layer is a fluid entangled laminate web comprising a support layer comprising a plurality of fibers and opposed first and second surfaces; a projection layer comprising a plurality of fibers and opposed inner and outer surfaces, the second surface of the support layer in contact with the inner surface of the projection layer, fibers of at least one of the support layer and the projection layer being fluid-entangled fibers of the other of the support layer and the projection layer; a plurality of hollow projections formed form a first plurality of the plurality of fibers in the projection layer, the plurality of hollow projections extending from the outer surface of the projection layer in a direction away from the support layer; and a land area, wherein the plurality of hollow projections are surrounded by the land area.
- the absorbent core has a body facing surface and projections extending away from the body facing surface of the absorbent core.
- the second component comprises at least one opening.
- FIG. 1 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article.
- FIG. 2 is a top down view of the absorbent article of FIG. 1 with portions cut away for clarity.
- FIG. 3 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article.
- FIG. 4 A is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article of FIG. 3 taken along line 4 A- 4 A.
- FIG. 4 B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article of FIG. 3 taken along line 4 B- 4 B.
- FIG. 5 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article.
- FIG. 6 A is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article of FIG. 5 taken along line 6 A- 6 A.
- FIG. 6 B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article of FIG. 5 taken along line 6 B- 6 B.
- FIG. 7 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article.
- FIG. 8 A is an exploded cross-sectional view of an exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article of FIG. 7 taken along line 8 A- 8 A.
- FIG. 8 B is an exploded cross-sectional view of an exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article of FIG. 7 taken along line 8 B- 8 B.
- FIG. 9 A is an exploded cross-sectional view of another exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article of FIG. 7 taken along line 9 A- 9 A.
- FIG. 9 B is an exploded cross-sectional view of another exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article of FIG. 7 taken along line 9 B- 9 B.
- FIG. 10 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of a topsheet layer.
- FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the topsheet layer of FIG. 10 taken along line 11 - 11 .
- FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the topsheet layer of FIG. 10 taken along line 11 - 11 showing possible directions of fiber movements within the topsheet layer due to a fluid entanglement process.
- FIG. 13 is a photomicrograph of a cross-sectional view of a portion of a foam and fiber composite.
- FIG. 14 is a photomicrograph of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite of FIG. 13 such that the fibrous material is visible to the viewer.
- FIG. 15 is a photomicrograph of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite of FIG. 13 such that the second planar surface of the foam material and portions of fibers are visible to the viewer.
- FIGS. 16 A- 16 D are cross-sectional side views taken in the longitudinal direction of exemplary embodiments of exudate management layers.
- FIG. 17 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer in fluid communication with an absorbent core.
- FIG. 18 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer in fluid communication with an absorbent core.
- FIG. 19 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer.
- FIG. 20 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer.
- FIG. 21 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer.
- FIG. 22 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer.
- FIG. 23 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article.
- FIG. 24 is a perspective view of an exemplary illustration of a set-up of an imaging system used for determining the percent open area of a fluid entangled laminate web.
- FIG. 25 is a perspective view of an exemplary illustration of a set-up of an imaging system for determining projection height of a fluid entangled laminate web.
- the present disclosure is directed towards an absorbent article which can have an improved conformity to the body of the wearer of the absorbent article providing for an improved intake and retention of body exudates such as fecal material.
- An absorbent article can have a longitudinal direction, a transverse direction, and a depth direction.
- the absorbent article can have an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region.
- the absorbent article can have a topsheet layer, a liquid impermeable layer, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer.
- the absorbent article can further include an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer.
- the exudate management layer can be positioned on a body facing surface of the topsheet layer.
- the exudate management layer can be positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core.
- the exudate management layer has a first component which at least partially defines an opening for direct passage of body exudates into the absorbent core.
- the exudate management layer has a second component connected to the first component.
- the first component can provide the exudate management layer with a first height dimension and the second component can provide the exudate management layer with a second height dimension that is greater than the first height dimension.
- absorbent article refers herein to an article which may be placed against or in proximity to the body (i.e., contiguous with the body) of the wearer to absorb and contain various liquid, solid, and semi-solid exudates discharged from the body.
- absorbent articles as described herein, are intended to be discarded after a limited period of use instead of being laundered or otherwise restored for reuse. It is to be understood that the present disclosure is applicable to various disposable absorbent articles, including, but not limited to, diapers, training pants, youth pants, swim pants, and incontinence products, and the like without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
- airlaid refers herein to a web manufactured by an airlaying process
- bundles of small fibers having typical lengths ranging from about 3 to about 52 mm are separated and entrained in an air supply and then deposited onto a forming screen, usually with the assistance of a vacuum supply.
- the randomly deposited fibers are then bonded to one another using, for example, hot air to activate a binder component or a latex adhesive.
- Airlaying is taught in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,640,810 to Laursen, et al., which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference thereto for all purposes.
- bonded refers to the joining, adhering, connecting, attaching, or the like, of two elements. Two elements will be considered bonded together when they are joined, adhered, connected, attached, or the like, directly to one another or indirectly to one another, such as when bonded to an intermediate element.
- the bonding can occur via, for example, adhesive, pressure bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, stitching, suturing, and/or welding.
- bonded carded web refers herein to webs that are made from staple fibers which are sent through a combing or carding unit which separates or breaks apart and aligns the staple fibers in the machine direction to form a generally machine direction oriented fibrous nonwoven web.
- This material may be bonded together by methods that can include point bonding, through air bonding, ultrasonic bonding, adhesive bonding, etc.
- coform refers herein to composite materials comprising a mixture or stabilized matrix of thermoplastic fibers and a second non-thermoplastic material.
- coform materials may be made by a process in which at least one meltblown die head is arranged near a chute through which other materials are added to the web while it is forming.
- Such other materials may include, but are not limited to, fibrous organic materials such as woody or non-woody pulp such as cotton, rayon, recycled paper, pulp fluff, and also superabsorbent particles, inorganic and/or organic absorbent materials, treated polymeric staple fibers and so forth.
- conjugate fibers refers herein to fibers which have been formed from at least two polymer sources extruded from separate extruders and spun together to form on fiber. Conjugate fibers are also sometimes referred to as bicomponent or multicomponent fibers.
- the polymers are arranged in substantially constantly positioned distinct zones across the cross-sections of the conjugate fibers and extend continuously along the length of the conjugate fibers.
- the configuration of such a conjugate fiber may be, for example, a sheath/core arrangement where one polymer is surrounded by another, or may be a side-by-side arrangement, a pie arrangement, or an “islands-in-the-sea” arrangement. Conjugate fibers are taught by U.S. Pat. No.
- the polymers may be present in ratios of 75/25, 50/50, 25/75 or any other desired ratio. Additionally, polymer additives such as processing aids may be included in each zone.
- machine direction refers to the length of a fabric in the direction in which it is produced, as opposed to a “cross-machine direction” (CD) which refers to the width of a fabric in a direction generally perpendicular to the machine direction.
- meltblown web refers herein to a nonwoven web that is formed by a process in which a molten thermoplastic material is extruded through a plurality of fine, usually circular, die capillaries as molten fibers into converging high velocity gas (e.g., air) streams that attenuate the fibers of molten thermoplastic material to reduce their diameter, which may be to microfiber diameter. Thereafter, the meltblown fibers are carried by the high velocity gas stream and are deposited on a collecting surface to form a web of randomly disbursed meltblown fibers.
- high velocity gas e.g., air
- meltblown fibers may be microfibers that are substantially continuous or discontinuous, generally smaller than 10 microns in diameter, and generally tacky when deposited onto a collecting surface.
- nonwoven fabric or “nonwoven web” refers herein to a web having a structure of individual fibers or threads which are interlaid, but not in an identifiable manner as in a knitted fabric.
- Nonwoven fabrics or webs have been formed from many processes such as, for example, meltblowing processes, spunbonding processes, through-air bonded carded web (also known as BCW and TABCW) processes, etc.
- the basis weight of nonwoven webs may generally vary, such as, from about 5, 10, or 20 gsm to about 120, 125, or 150 gsm.
- spunbond web refers herein to a web containing small diameter substantially continuous fibers.
- the fibers are formed by extruding a molten thermoplastic material from a plurality of fine, usually circular, capillaries of a spinneret with the diameter of the extruded fibers then being rapidly reduced as by, for example, eductive drawing and/or other well-known spunbonding mechanisms.
- the production of spunbond webs is described and illustrated, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,340,563 to Appel, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,692,618 to Dorschner, et al., U.S. Pat. No.
- Spunbond fibers are generally not tacky when they are deposited onto a collecting surface. Spunbond fibers may sometimes have diameters less than about 40 microns, and often between about 5 to about 20 microns.
- SAP superabsorbent polymer
- hydrogels which can be cross-linked, absorb aqueous solutions through hydrogen bonding and other polar forces with water molecules.
- a SAP's ability to absorb water is based in par on iconicity (a factor of the ionic concentration of the aqueous solution), and the SAP functional polar groups that have an affinity for water.
- SAP are typically made from the polymerization of acrylic acid blended with sodium hydroxide I the presence of an initiator to form a poly-acrylic acid sodium salt (sometimes referred to as sodium polyacrylate).
- SAP may be present in absorbent articles in particle or fibrous form or as a coating or another material or fiber.
- the present disclosure is directed towards an absorbent article which can have an improved conformity to the body of the wearer of the absorbent article providing for an improved intake and retention of body exudates such as fecal material.
- An absorbent article can have a longitudinal direction, a transverse direction, and a depth direction.
- the absorbent article can have an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region.
- the absorbent article can have a topsheet layer, a liquid impermeable layer, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer.
- the absorbent article can further include an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer.
- the exudate management layer can be positioned on a body facing surface of the topsheet layer.
- the exudate management layer can be positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core.
- the exudate management layer has a first component which at least partially defines an opening for direct passage of body exudates into the absorbent core.
- the exudate management layer has a second component connected to the first component.
- the first component can provide the exudate management layer with a first height dimension and the second component can provide the exudate management layer with a second height dimension that is greater than the first height dimension.
- an absorbent article 10 of the present disclosure is exemplified in the form of a diaper. It is to be understood that the present disclosure is suitable for use with various other absorbent articles which are designed to be worn about the lower torso of a wearer, such as, but not limited to, training pants or adult incontinence pants, without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 1 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article 10 and
- FIG. 2 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article 10 with portions cut away for clarity.
- FIGS. 3 , 4 A, 4 B, 5 , 6 A, 6 B, 7 , 8 A, 8 B, 9 A , and 9 B provide further illustrations of exemplary embodiments of an absorbent article 10 with an exudate management layer 40 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have a longitudinal direction (X), a transverse direction (Y), and a depth direction (Z).
- the absorbent article 10 can have an anterior region 12 , a posterior region 14 , and a central region 16 located between the anterior region 12 and the posterior region 14 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have a first transverse direction end edge 20 , a second transverse direction end edge 22 opposed to the first transverse direction end edge 20 , and a pair of opposing longitudinal direction side edges 24 extending between and connecting the first and second transverse direction end edges, 20 and 22 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have a wearer facing, liquid permeable topsheet layer 30 and a garment facing, liquid impermeable layer 36 .
- An absorbent core 38 can be positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the liquid impermeable layer 36 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have an exudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with the topsheet layer 30 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned on a body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 such as, for example, illustrated in the exemplary embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 3 , 4 A, 4 B, 5 , 6 A, and 6 B .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the absorbent core 38 such as, for example, illustrated in the exemplary embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 7 , 8 A, 8 B, 9 A, and 9 B .
- the topsheet layer 30 and the liquid impermeable layer 36 can both extend beyond the outermost peripheral edges of the absorbent core 38 and can be peripherally bonded together, either entirely or partially, using known bonding techniques to form a sealed peripheral region.
- the topsheet layer 30 and the liquid impermeable layer 36 can be bonded together by adhesive bonding, ultrasonic bonding, or any other suitable bonding technique known in the art.
- the absorbent article 10 can be worn about the lower torso of the wearer and can have a waist opening 230 and leg openings 232 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have leg elastic members, 240 and 242 , which can be bonded to the liquid impermeable layer 36 such as by, for example, an adhesive, generally adjacent the lateral outer edges of the liquid impermeable layer 36 .
- the leg elastic members, 240 and 242 may be disposed between other layers of the absorbent article 10 .
- Suitable elastic materials can include sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric materials.
- the elastic materials can be stretched and secured to a substrate, secured to a gathered substrate, or secured to a substrate and then elasticized or shrunk, for example, with the application of heat, such that the elastic retractive forces are imparted to the substrate.
- the absorbent article 10 can have waist elastic members, 244 and 246 , which can be formed of any suitable elastic material.
- suitable elastic materials can include, but are not limited to, sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric polymers.
- the elastic materials can be stretched and bonded to a substrate, bonded to a gathered substrate, or bonded to a substrate and then elasticized or shrunk, for example, with the application of heat, such that elastic retractive forces are imparted to the substrate.
- the waist elastic members, 244 and 246 may be omitted from the absorbent article 10 without departing from the scope of this disclosure.
- the absorbent article 10 can include a fastener system.
- the fastener system can include one or more back fasteners 250 and one or more front fasteners 252 . Portions of the fastener system may be included in the anterior region 12 , posterior region 14 , or both.
- the fastener system can be configured to secure the absorbent article 10 about the waist of the wearer and maintain the absorbent article 10 in place during use.
- the back fasteners 250 can include one or more materials bonded together to form a composite ear as is known in the art.
- the composite fastener may be composed of a stretch component 254 , a nonwoven carrier or hook base 256 , and a fastening component 258 .
- the topsheet layer 30 defines a body facing surface 32 of the absorbent article 10 that may directly contact the body of the wearer and is liquid permeable to receive body exudates.
- the topsheet layer 30 is desirably provided for comfort and functions to direct body exudates away from the body of the wearer, through its own structure, and towards the absorbent core 38 .
- the topsheet layer 30 desirably retains little to no liquid in its structure, so that it provides a relatively comfortable and non-irritating surface next to the skin of the wearer of the absorbent article 10 .
- the topsheet layer 30 can be a single layer of material, or alternatively, can be multiple layers that have been laminated together.
- the topsheet layer 30 can be constructed of any material such as one or more woven sheets, one or more fibrous nonwoven sheets, one or more film sheets, such as blown or extruded films, which may themselves be of single or multiple layers, one or more foam sheets, such as reticulated, open cell or closed cell foams, a coated nonwoven sheet, or a combination of any of these materials. Such combination can be adhesively, thermally, or ultrasonically laminated into a unified planar sheet structure to form a topsheet layer 30 .
- the topsheet layer 30 can be constructed from various nonwoven webs such as meltblown webs, spunbond webs, hydroentangled spunlace webs, or through air bonded carded webs.
- suitable topsheet layer 30 materials can include, but are not limited to, natural fiber webs (such as cotton), rayon, hydroentangled webs, bonded carded webs of polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene, nylon, or other heat-bondable fibers (such as bicomponent fibers), polyolefins, copolymers of polypropylene and polyethylene, linear low-density polyethylene, and aliphatic esters such as polylactic acid. Finely perforated films and net materials can also be used, as can laminates of/or combinations of these materials.
- topsheet layer 30 can be a bonded carded web made of polypropylene and polyethylene such as that obtainable from Sandler Corp., Germany.
- U.S. Pat. No. 4,801,494 to Datta, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 4,908,026 to Sukiennik, et al., and WO 2009/062998 to Texol teach various other topsheet materials that may be used as the topsheet layer 30 , each of which is hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety.
- Additional topsheet layer 30 materials can include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,397,644 to Matthews, et al., U.S. Pat. No.
- the topsheet layer 30 may contain a plurality of apertures formed therethrough to permit body exudates to pass more readily into the absorbent core 38 .
- the apertures may be randomly or uniformly arranged throughout the topsheet layer 30 .
- the size, shape, diameter, and number of apertures may be varied to suit an absorbent article's 10 particular needs.
- the tospheet layer 30 can have a basis weight ranging from about 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 gsm to about 50, 100, 120, 125, or 150 gsm.
- a topsheet layer 30 can be constructed from a through air bonded carded web having a basis weight ranging from about 15 gsm to about 100 gsm.
- a topsheet layer 30 can be constructed from a through air bonded carded web having a basis weight from about 20 gsm to about 50 gsm, such as a through air bonded carded web that is readily available from nonwoven material manufacturers, such as Xiamen Yanjan Industry, Beijing, DaYuan Nonwoven Fabrics, and others.
- the topsheet layer 30 can be at least partially hydrophilic. In various embodiments, a portion of the topsheet layer 30 can be hydrophilic and a portion of the topsheet layer 30 can be hydrophobic. In various embodiments, the portions of the topsheet layer 30 which can be hydrophobic can be either an inherently hydrophobic material or can be a material treated with a hydrophobic coating.
- the topsheet layer 30 can be a multicomponent topsheet layer 30 such as by having two or more different nonwoven or film materials, with the different materials placed in separate locations in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the topsheet layer 30 can be a two layer or multicomponent material having a central portion positioned along and straddling a longitudinal centerline 18 of an absorbent article 10 , with lateral side portions flanking and bonded to each side edge of the central portion.
- the central portion can be constructed from a first material and the side portions can be constructed from a material which can be the same as or different from the material of the central portion.
- the central portion may be at least partially hydrophilic and the side portions may be inherently hydrophobic or may be treated with a hydrophobic coating.
- multi-component topsheet layers 30 are generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,961,505 to Coe, U.S. Pat. No. 5,415,640 to Kirby, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,117,523 to Sugahara, each of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto in its entirety.
- a central portion of a topsheet layer 30 can be positioned symmetrically about the absorbent article 10 longitudinal centerline 18 .
- Such central longitudinally directed central portion can be a through air bonded carded web (“TABCW”) having a basis weight between about 15 and about 100 gsm.
- TABCW through air bonded carded web
- Previously described nonwoven, woven, and aperture film topsheet layer materials may also be used as the central portion of a topsheet layer 30 .
- the central portion can be constructed from a TABCW material having a basis weight from about 20 gsm to about 50 gsm such as is available from Xiamen Yanjan Industry, Beijing, DaYuan Nonwoven Fabrics, and others.
- aperture films such as those available from such film suppliers as Texol, Italy and Tredegar, U.S.A.
- Different nonwoven, woven, or film sheet materials may be utilized as the side portions of the topsheet layer 30 .
- the selection of such topsheet layer 30 materials can vary based upon the overall desired attributes of the topsheet layer 30 .
- Such side portions can be adhesively, thermally, ultrasonically, or otherwise bonded to the central portion along or adjacent the longitudinally directed side edges of the central portion.
- Traditional absorbent article construction adhesive may be used to bond the side portions to the central portion. Either of the central portion and/or the side portions may be treated with surfactants and/or skin-health benefit agents, as are well known in the art.
- Such longitudinally directed side portions can be of a single or multi-layered construction.
- the side portions can be adhesively or otherwise bonded laminates.
- the side portions can be constructed of an upper fibrous nonwoven layer, such as a spunbond material, laminated to a bottom layer of a hydrophobic barrier film material.
- a spunbond layer may be formed from a polyolefin, such as a polypropylene and can include a wetting agent if desired.
- a spunbond layer can have a basis weight from about 10 or 12 gsm to about 30 or 70 gsm and can be treated with hydrophilic wetting agents.
- a film layer may have apertures to allow fluid to permeate to lower layers, and may be either of a single layer or multi-layer construction.
- such film can be a polyolefin, such as polyethylene having a basis weight from about 10 to about 40 gsm.
- Construction adhesive can be utilized to laminate the spunbond layer to the film layer at an add-on level of between about 0.1 gsm and 15 gsm.
- a film barrier layer may include opacifying agents, such as film pigments, that can help the film in masking stains along the absorbent article 10 side edges, thereby serving as a masking element.
- the film layer can serve to limit visualization of a fluid insult stain along the absorbent article 10 side edges when viewed from above the topsheet layer 30 .
- the film layer may also serve as a barrier layer to prevent rewet of the topsheet layer 30 as well as to prevent the flow of fluid off the side edges of the absorbent article 10 .
- the side portions can be laminates such as a spunbond-meltblown-meltblown-spunbond layer (“SMMS”) laminate, spunbond-film laminate, or alternatively, other nonwoven laminate combinations.
- SMMS spunbond-meltblown-meltblown-spunbond layer
- the topsheet layer 30 can be a fluid entangled laminate web 160 with projections 162 extending outwardly and away from at least one intended body-facing surface of the laminate web 160 such as illustrated in FIGS. 10 - 12 .
- the projections 162 can be hollow.
- the laminate web 160 can have two layers such as a support layer 164 and a projection layer 166 .
- the support layer 164 can have a first surface 168 and an opposed second surface 170 as well as a thickness 172 .
- the projection layer 166 can have an inner surface 174 and an opposed outer surface 176 as well as a thickness 178 .
- An interface 180 can be present between the support layer 164 and the projection layer 166 .
- fibers of the projection layer 166 can cross the interface 180 and be entangled with and engage the support layer 164 so as to form the laminate web 160 .
- the support layer 164 is a fibrous nonwoven web
- the fibers of the support layer 164 may cross the interface 180 and be entangled with the fibers of the projection layer 166 .
- the projections 162 can be filled with fibers from the projection layer 166 and/or the support layer 164 .
- the projections 162 can be hollow.
- the projections 162 can have closed ends 182 which can be devoid of apertures. In various embodiments, however, it may be desirable to create one or more apertures in each of the projections 162 .
- Such apertures can be formed in the closed ends 182 and/or side walls 184 of the projections 162 .
- Such apertures are to be distinguished from interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing which is the spacing from one individual fiber to the next individual fiber.
- the projections 162 can have a percentage of open area in which light can pass through the projections 162 unhindered by the material forming the projections 162 , such as, for example, fibrous material.
- the percentage of open area present in the projections 162 encompasses all area of the projection 162 wherein light can pass through the projection 162 unhindered.
- the percentage of open area of a projection 162 can encompass all open area of the projection 162 via apertures, interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing, and any other spacing within the projection 162 where light can pass through unhindered.
- the projections 162 can be formed without apertures and the open area can be due to the interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing.
- the projections 162 can have less than about 1, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 as measured according to the Method to Determine Percent Open Area test method described herein.
- the shapes of the projections 162 when viewed from above, may be, for example, round, oval, square, rectangular, triangular, diamond-shaped, etc. Both the width and the height of the projections 162 can be varied as can be the spacing and pattern of the projections 162 .
- the projections 162 can have a height, measured according to the Method for Determining Height of Projections test method described herein, of greater than about 1 mm. In various embodiments, the projections 162 can have a height greater than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 mm. In various embodiments, the projections 162 can have a height from about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 mm to about 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 mm.
- the projections 162 of the laminate web 160 can be located on and emanate from the outer surface 176 of the projection layer 166 .
- the projections 162 can extend from the outer surface 176 of the projection layer 166 in a direction away from the support layer 164 .
- they can have open ends 186 which can be located towards the inner surface 174 of the projection layer 166 and can be covered by the second surface 170 of the support layer 164 or the inner surface 174 of the projection layer 166 depending upon the amount of fiber that has been used from the projection layer 166 to form the projections 162 .
- the projections 162 can be surrounded by land areas 188 which can be formed from the outer surface 176 of the projection layer 166 though the thickness of the land areas 188 can be comprised of both the projection layer 166 and the support layer 164 .
- the land areas 188 can be relatively flat and planar or topographical variability may be built into the land areas 188 .
- a land area 188 may have a plurality of three-dimensional shapes formed into it by forming the projection layer 166 on a three-dimensionally-shaped forming surface such as is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,741,941 to Engelbert, et al. and incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
- a land area 188 may be provided with depressions 190 which can extend all or part way into the projection layer 166 and/or support layer 164 .
- a land area 188 may be subjected to embossing which can impart surface texture and other functional attributes to the land area 188 .
- a land area 188 and the laminate web 160 as a whole may be provided with apertures 192 which can extend through the laminate web 160 so as to further facilitate the movement of body exudate into and through the laminate web 160 .
- Such apertures 192 are to be distinguished from interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing, which is the spacing from one individual fiber to the next individual fiber.
- the land areas 188 can have a percentage of open area in which light can pass through the land areas 188 unhindered by the material forming the land areas 188 , such as, for example, fibrous material.
- the percentage of open area present in the land areas 188 encompasses all area of the land areas 188 where light can pass through the land areas 188 unhindered.
- the percentage of open area of a land area 188 can encompass all open area of the land areas 188 via apertures, interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing, and any other spacing within the land areas 188 when light can pass through unhindered.
- the land areas 188 can have greater than about 1% open area in a chosen area of laminate web 160 , as measured according to the Method to Determine Percent Open Area test method described herein. In various embodiments, the land areas 188 can be formed without apertures and the open area can be due to the interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing. In various embodiments, the land areas 188 can have greater than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 .
- the land areas 188 can have about 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5, 11, 11.5, 12, 12.5, 13, 13.5, 14, 14.5, 15, 15.5, 16, 16.5, 17, 17.5, 18, 18.5, 19, 19.5, or 20% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 .
- the land areas 188 can have from about 1, 2, or 3% to about 4 or 5% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 .
- the land areas 188 can have from about 5, 6, or 7% to about 8, 9, or 10% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 .
- the land areas 188 can have from about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15% to about 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 . In various embodiments, the land areas can have greater than about 20% open area in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 .
- the projections 162 of the laminate web 160 can be provided in any orientation as deemed suitable. In various embodiments, the projections 162 of the laminate web 160 can be provided randomly to the laminate web 160 . In various embodiments, the projections 162 can be oriented linearly in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 . In various embodiments, the projections 162 can be oriented linearly in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 . In various embodiments, the projections 162 can be oriented linearly in a direction which can be at an angle to the longitudinal direction (X) and/or the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 . The land areas 188 of the laminate web 160 can be provided in any orientation as deemed suitable.
- the land areas 188 can be oriented linearly in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 . In various embodiments, the land areas 188 can be oriented linearly in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 . In various embodiments, the land areas 188 can be oriented linearly in a direction which can be at an angle to the longitudinal direction (X) and the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the projections 162 and/or the land areas 188 can be provided such that the projections 162 are located in the central region 16 of the absorbent article 10 , are located towards the perimeter of the absorbent article 10 , and combinations thereof.
- the projections 162 can have varying heights in different areas of the absorbent article 10 .
- the projections 162 can have a first height in an area of the absorbent article 10 and a different height in a different area of the absorbent article 10 .
- the projections 162 can have varying diameters in different areas of the absorbent article 10 .
- the projections 162 can have a first diameter in an area of the absorbent article 10 and can have a different diameter in another area of the absorbent article 10 .
- the concentration of projections 162 can vary in the absorbent article 10 .
- an area of the absorbent article 10 can have a higher concentration of projections 162 than the concentration of projections 162 in a second area of the absorbent article 10 .
- the projections 162 can be “hollow.”
- the projections 162 can have a shell 194 formed from the fibers of the projection layer 166 .
- the shell 194 can define an interior space 196 which can have a lower density of fibers as compared to the shell 194 of the projections 162 .
- density it is meant the fiber count or content per chosen unit of volume within a portion of the interior space 196 or the shell 194 of the projection 162 .
- the density of the shell 194 may vary within a particular or individual projection 162 and it also may vary as between different projections 162 .
- the size of the hollow interior space 196 as well as its density may vary within a particular or individual projection 162 and it also may vary as between different projections 162 . If there is at least some portion of an interior space 196 of a projection 162 that has a lower fiber density than at least some portion of the shell 194 of the same projection 162 , then the projection 162 is regarded as being “hollow”.
- the projection 162 is regarded as being “hollow”, If at least a portion of the projections 162 of a laminate web 160 are hollow, the projection layer 166 and the laminate web 160 are regarded as being “hollow” or as having “hollow projections”.
- the portion of the projections 162 which are hollow can be greater than or equal to about 50 percent of the projections 162 in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 . In various embodiments, greater than or equal to about 70 percent of the projections 162 in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 can be hollow. In various embodiments, greater than or equal to about 90 percent of the projections 162 in a chosen area of the laminate web 160 can be hollow.
- the laminate web 160 can be the result of the movement of the fibers in the projection layer 166 in one and sometimes two or more directions.
- the laminate web 160 can be a fluid entangled laminate web. Referring to FIG. 12 , if the forming surface upon which the projection layer 166 is placed is solid except for the forming holes used to form the projections 162 , then the force of the fluid entangling streams hitting and rebounding off the solid surface land areas corresponding to the land areas 188 of the projection layer 166 can cause a migration of fibers adjacent the inner surface 174 of the projection layer 166 into the support layer 164 adjacent its second surface 170 . This migration of fibers in the first direction can be represented by the arrows 198 shown in FIG. 12 .
- the support layer 164 can be a fibrous nonwoven web, depending on the degree of web integrity and the strength and dwell time of the fluid jets during the entanglement process, there may also be movement of support layer 164 fibers into the projection layer 166 as shown by arrows 202 in FIG. 12 .
- the net result of these fiber movements can be the creation of a laminate web 160 with good overall integrity and lamination of the layers ( 164 and 166 ) at their interface 180 thereby allowing further processing and handling of the laminate web 160 .
- the fluid pressure used to form the projections 162 be of sufficient force so as to force fibers from the support layer 164 to be exposed on the outer surface 176 of the projection layer 166 .
- the support layer 164 can support the projection layer 166 and can be made from a number of structures provided the support layer 164 can be capable of supporting the projection layer 166 .
- the primary functions of the support layer 164 can be to protect the projection layer 166 during the formation of the projections 162 , to be able to bond to or be entangled with the projection layer 166 and to aid in further processing of the projection layer 166 and the resultant laminate web 160 .
- Suitable materials for the support layer 164 can include, but are not limited to, nonwoven fabrics or webs, scrim materials, netting materials, paper/cellulose/wood pulp-based products which can be considered a subset of nonwoven fabrics or webs as well as foam materials, films and combinations of the foregoing provided the material or materials chosen are capable of withstanding a process of manufacture such as a fluid-entangling process.
- the support layer 164 can be a fibrous nonwoven web made from a plurality of randomly deposited fibers which may be staple length fibers such as are used, for example, in carded webs, air laid webs, etc. or they may be more continuous fibers such as are found in, for example, meltblown or spunbond webs.
- the support layer 164 can have a higher degree of integrity than the projection layer 166 .
- the support layer 164 can remain substantially intact when it is subjected to a fluid-entangling process.
- the degree of integrity of the support layer 164 can be such that the material forming the support layer 164 can resist being driven down into and filling the projections 162 of the projection layer 166 .
- the support layer 164 is a fibrous nonwoven web, it should have a higher degree of fiber-to-fiber bonding and/or fiber entanglement than the fibers in the projection layer 166 .
- the support layer 164 can have a higher degree of integrity than the projection layer 166 .
- This higher degree of integrity can be brought about in a number of ways.
- other materials may be added to the fibrous mix such as adhesives and/or bicomponent fibers.
- Pre-entanglement of a fibrous nonwoven support layer 164 may also be used such as, for example, by subjecting the web to hydroentangling, needlepunching, etc., prior to this support layer 164 being joined to a projection layer 166 . Combinations of the foregoing are also possible. Still other materials such as foams, scrims and nettings may have enough initial integrity so as to not need further processing. The level of integrity can in many cases be visually observed due to, for example, the observation with the unaided eye of such techniques as point bonding which is commonly used with fibrous nonwoven webs such as spunbond webs and staple fiber-containing webs.
- FIG. 164 Further magnification of the support layer 164 may also reveal the use of fluid-entangling or the use of thermal and/or adhesive bonding to join the fibers together.
- tensile testing in either or both of the machine and cross-machine directions may be undertaken to compare the integrity of the support layer 164 to the projection layer 166 . See for example ASTM test D5035-11 which is incorporated herein its entirety for all purposes.
- the type, basis weight, tensile strength and other properties of the support layer 164 can be chosen and varied depending upon the particular end use of the resultant laminate web 160 .
- the support layer 164 be a layer that is fluid pervious, has good wet and dry strength, is able to absorb fluids such as body exudates, possibly retain the fluids for a certain period of time and then release the fluids to one or more subjacent layers.
- fibrous nonwovens such as spunbond webs, meltblown webs and carded webs such as airlaid webs, bonded carded webs and coform materials are well-suited as support layers 164 .
- the support layer 164 may be a multi-layered material due to the use of several layers or the use of multi-bank formation processes as are commonly used in making spunbond webs and meltblown webs as well as layered combinations of meltblown and spunbond webs. In the formation of such support layers 164 , both natural and synthetic materials may be used alone or in combination to fabricate the materials. In various embodiments, the support layer 164 can have a basis weight ranging from about 5 to about 40 or 50 gsm.
- the type, basis weight and porosity of the support layer 164 can affect the process conditions necessary to form the projections 162 in the projection layer 166 .
- Heavier basis weight materials can increase the entangling force of the entangling fluid streams needed to form the projections 162 in the projection layer 166 .
- heavier basis weight support layers 164 can also provide improved support for the projection layer 166 as the projection layer 166 by itself can be too stretchy to maintain the shape of the projections 162 post the formation process.
- the projection layer 164 by itself can unduly elongate in the machine direction due to the mechanical forces exerted on it by subsequent winding and converting processes and consequently diminish and distort the projections.
- the projections 162 in the projection layer 166 tend to collapse due to the winding pressures and compressive weights the projection layer 166 experiences in the winding process and subsequent conversion and do not recover to the extent they do when a support layer 164 is present.
- the support layer 164 may be subjected to further treatment and/or additives to alter or enhance its properties.
- surfactants and other chemicals may be added both internally and externally to the components forming all or a portion of the support layer 164 to alter or enhance its properties.
- Compounds commonly referred to as hydrogels or superabsorbents which absorb many times their weight in liquids may be added to the support layer 164 in both particulate and fiber form.
- the projection layer 166 can be made from a plurality of randomly deposited fibers which may be staple length fibers such as are used, for example, in carded webs, airlaid webs, coform webs, etc., or they may be more continuous fibers such as are found in, for example, meltblown or spunbond webs.
- the fibers in the projection layer 166 can have less fiber-to-fiber bonding and/or fiber entanglement and thus less integrity as compared to the integrity of the support layer 164 , especially in embodiments when the support layer 164 is a fibrous nonwoven web.
- the fibers in the projection layer 166 may have no initial fiber-to-fiber bonding for purposes of allowing the formation of the projections 162 .
- the projection layer 166 can have less integrity than the support layer 164 due to the projection layer 166 having, for example, less fiber-to-fiber bonding, less adhesive or less pre-entanglement of the fibers forming the projection layer 166 .
- the projection layer 166 can have a sufficient amount of fiber movement capability to allow a fluid entangling process to be able to move a first plurality of the plurality of fibers of the projection layer 166 out of the X-Y plane of the projection layer 166 and into the perpendicular or Z-direction of the projection layer 166 so as to be able to form the projections 162 .
- the projections 162 can be hollow.
- a second plurality of the plurality of fibers in the projection layer 166 can become entangled with the support layer 164 .
- continuous fibers such as meltblown or spunbond webs
- Longer fibers such as are generated in meltblowing and spunbonding processes (which are often referred to as continuous fibers to differentiate them from staple length fibers) will typically require more force to displace the fibers in the Z-direction than will shorter, staple length fibers that typically have fiber lengths less than about 100 mm and more typically fibers lengths in the 10 to 60 mm range.
- staple fiber webs such as carded webs and airlaid webs can have some degree of pre-bonding or entanglement of the fibers due to their shorter length.
- Such shorter fibers require less fluid force from the fluid entangling streams to move them in the Z-direction to form the projections 162 .
- a balance must be met between fiber length, degree of pre-fiber bonding, fluid force, web speed and dwell time so as to be able to create the projections 162 without, unless desired, forming apertures in the land areas 188 or the projections 162 or forcing too much material into the interior space 196 of the projections 162 thereby making the projections 162 too rigid for some end-use applications.
- the projection layer 166 can have a basis weight ranging from about 10 gsm to about 60 gsm.
- Spunbond webs can typically have basis weights of between about 15 and about 50 gsm when being used as the projection layer 166 .
- Fiber diameters can range between about 5 and about 20 microns.
- the fibers may be single component fibers formed from a single polymer composition or they may be bicomponent or multicomponent fibers wherein one portion of the fiber can have a lower melting point than the other components so as to allow fiber-to-fiber bonding through the use of heat and/or pressure. Hollow fibers may also be used.
- the fibers may be formed from any polymer formulations typically used to form spunbond webs.
- spunbond webs may be subjected to post-formation bonding and entangling techniques if necessary to improve the processability of the web prior to its being subjected to the projection forming process.
- Meltblown webs can typically have basis weights of between about 20 and about 50 gsm when being used as the projection layer 166 .
- Fiber diameters can range between about 0.5 and about 5 microns.
- the fibers may be single component fibers formed from a single polymer composition or they may be bicomponent or multicomponent fibers wherein one portion of the fiber can have a lower melting point than the other components so as to allow fiber-to-fiber bonding through the use of heat and/or pressure.
- the fibers may be formed from any polymer formulations typically used to form spunbond webs. Examples of such polymers include, but are not limited to, PP, PET, PA, PE and PLA.
- Carded and airlaid webs can use staple fibers that can typically range in length between about 10 and about 100 millimeters.
- Fiber denier can range between about 0.5 and about 6 denier depending upon the particular end use.
- Basis weights can range between about 20 and about 60 gsm.
- the staple fibers may be made from a wide variety of polymers including, but not limited to, PP, PET, PA, PE, PLA, cotton, rayon, flax, wool, hemp and regenerated cellulose such as, for example, Viscose.
- Blends of fibers may be utilized too, such as blends of bicomponent fibers and single component fibers as well as blends of solid fibers and hollow fibers.
- bonding it may be accomplished in a number of ways including, for example, through-air bonding, calender bonding, point bonding, chemical bonding and adhesive bonding such as powder bonding.
- the projection layer 166 may be subjected to pre-entanglement processes to increase fiber entanglement within the projection layer 166 prior to the formation of the projections 162 . Hydroentangling can be advantageous in this regard.
- Examples of a laminate web 160 and process for manufacturing a laminate web 160 can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 9,474,660 to Kirby et al. which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- An absorbent core 38 can be positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the liquid impermeable layer 36 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the absorbent core 38 can generally be any single layer structure or combination of layer components, which can demonstrate some level of compressibility, conformability, be non-irritating to the wearer's skin, and capable of absorbing and retaining liquids and other body exudates.
- the absorbent core 38 can be formed from a variety of different materials and can contain any number of desired layers.
- the absorbent core 38 can include one or more layers (e.g., two layers) of absorbent web material of cellulosic fibers (e.g., wood pulp fibers), other natural fibers, synthetic fibers, woven or nonwoven sheets, scrim netting, or other stabilizing structures, superabsorbent material, binder materials, surfactants, selected hydrophobic and hydrophilic materials, pigments, lotions, odor control agents or the like, as well as combinations thereof.
- the absorbent web material can include a matrix of cellulosic fluff and can also include superabsorbent material.
- the cellulosic fluff can comprise a blend of wood pulp fluff.
- An example of wood pulp fluff can be identified with the trade designation NB416, available from Weyerhaeuser Corp., and is a bleached, highly absorbent wood pulp containing primarily soft wood fibers.
- the absorbent core 38 can include an optional amount of superabsorbent material.
- suitable superabsorbent material can include poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), poly(acrylamide), poly(vinyl ether), maleic anhydride copolymers with vinyl ethers and ⁇ -olefins, poly(vinyl pyrrolidone), poly(vinylmorpholinone), poly(vinyl alcohol), and salts and copolymers thereof.
- superabsorbent materials can include unmodified natural polymers and modified natural polymers, such as hydrolyzed acrylonitrile-grafted starch, acrylic acid grafted starch, methyl cellulose, chitosan, carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, and natural gums, such as alginates, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, and so forth. Mixtures of natural and wholly or partially synthetic superabsorbent polymers can also be useful.
- the superabsorbent material can be present in the absorbent core 38 in any amount as desired.
- the absorbent materials can be formed into a web structure by employing various conventional methods and techniques.
- the absorbent web can be formed by techniques such as, but not limited to, a dry-forming technique, an air forming technique, a wet forming technique, a foam forming technique, or the like, as well as combinations thereof.
- a coform nonwoven material can also be employed. Methods and apparatus for carrying out such techniques are well known in the art.
- the shape of the absorbent core 38 can vary as desired and can comprise any one of various shapes including, but not limited to, triangular, rectangular, dog-bone, elliptical, trapezoidal, T-shape, I-shape, and hourglass shapes.
- the absorbent core 38 can have a shape that generally corresponds with the overall shape of the absorbent article 10 .
- the dimensions of the absorbent core 38 can be substantially similar to those of the absorbent article 10 , however, it will be appreciated that the dimensions of the absorbent core 38 while similar, will often be less than those of the overall absorbent article 10 , in order to be adequately contained therein.
- the size and the absorbent capacity of the absorbent core 38 should be compatible with the size of the intended wearer and the liquid loading imparted by the intended use of the absorbent article 10 . Additionally, the size and the absorbent capacity of the absorbent core 38 can be varied to accommodate wearers ranging from infants to adults.
- the absorbent core 38 can have a length ranging from about 120, 125, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, or 350 mm to about 355, 360, 380, 385, 390, 395, 400, 410, 415, 420, 425, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500, 510, 520, 530, 540, 550, 600, 610, 620, or 630 mm.
- the absorbent core 38 may have a width in the central region 16 ranging from about 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, or 70 mm to about 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170 or 180 mm.
- the width of the absorbent core 38 located within the anterior region 12 and/or posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10 may range from about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125 or 130 mm.
- the absorbent core 38 can have a length and width that can be less than or equal to the length and width of the absorbent article 10 .
- the absorbent article 10 can be a diaper having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent core 38 having an hourglass shape: the length of the absorbent core 38 may range from about 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 240 or 250 mm to about 260, 280, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, 350, 355, 360, 380, 385, or 390 mm; the width of the absorbent core 38 in the central region 16 may range from about 40, 50, 55, or 60 mm to about 65, 70, 75, or 80 mm; the width of the absorbent core 38 in the anterior region 12 and/or the posterior region 14 may range from about 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, or 110 mm.
- the absorbent article 10 may be a training pant or youth pant having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent core 38 having an hourglass shape: the length of the absorbent core 38 may range from about 400, 410, 420, 440 or 450 mm to about 460, 480, 500, 510 or 520 mm; the width of the absorbent core 38 in the central region 16 may range from about 50, 55, or 60 mm to about 65, 70, 75, or 80 mm; the width of the absorbent core 38 in the anterior region 12 and/or the posterior region 14 may range from about 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, or 130 mm.
- the absorbent article 10 can be an adult incontinence garment having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent core 38 having a rectangular shape: the length of the absorbent core 38 may range from about 400, 410 or 415 to about 425 or 450 mm; the width of the absorbent core 38 in the central region 16 may range from about 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, or 110 mm. It should be noted that the absorbent core 38 of an adult incontinence garment may or may not extend into either or both the anterior region 12 or the posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the absorbent article 10 can be a feminine hygiene product having the following ranges of lengths and widths of an absorbent body 40 having an hourglass shape: the length of the absorbent core 38 may range from about 150, 160, 170, or 180 mm to about 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 or 320 mm; the width of the absorbent core 38 in the central region 16 may range from about 30, 40, or 50 mm to about 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 mm.
- suitable materials and/or structures for the absorbent core 38 can include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,610,678 to Weisman, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,060,636 to Yahiaoui, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,610,903 to Latimer, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 7,358,282 to Krueger, et al., and U.S. Publication No. 2010/0174260 to Di Luccio, et al. each of which is hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety.
- an absorbent core 38 can be a single layer structure and can include, for example, a matrix of cellulosic fluff and superabsorbent material.
- an absorbent core 38 can have at least two layers of material, such as, for example, a body facing layer and a garment facing layer.
- the two layers can be identical to each other.
- the two layers can be different from each other. In such embodiments, the two layers can provide the absorbent article 10 with different absorption properties as deemed suitable.
- the body facing layer of the absorbent core 38 may be constructed of an airlaid material and the garment facing layer of the absorbent core 38 may be constructed of a superabsorbent polymer-containing compressed sheet.
- the airlaid material can have a basis weight from about 40 to about 200 gsm and the superabsorbent polymer-containing compressed sheet can be a cellulosic fluff based material that can be a combination of cellulosic pulp and SAP enclosed with a tissue carrier and having a basis weight from about 40 to about 400 gsm.
- the liquid impermeable layer 36 is generally liquid impermeable and is the portion of the absorbent article 10 which faces the garments of the wearer.
- the liquid impermeable layer 36 can permit the passage of air or vapor out of the absorbent article 10 while still blocking the passage of liquids.
- Any liquid impermeable material may generally be utilized to form the liquid impermeable layer 36 .
- the liquid impermable layer 36 can be composed of a single layer or multiple layers, and these one or more layers can themselves comprise similar or different materials. Suitable material that may be utilized can be a microporous polymeric film, such as a polyolefin film or polyethylene or polypropylene, nonwovens, and nonwoven laminates, and film/nonwoven laminates.
- the particular structure and composition of the liquid impermeable layer 36 can be selected from various known films and/or fabrics with the particular material being selected as appropriate to provide the desired level of liquid barrier, strength, abrasion resistance, tactile properties, aesthetics, and so forth.
- a polyethylene film can be utilized that can have a thickness in the range of from about 0.2 or 0.5 mils to about 3.0 or 5.0 mils.
- An example of a liquid impermeable layer 36 can be a polyethylene film such as that obtainable from Pliant Corp., Schaumburg, Ill., USA. Another example can include calcium carbonate-filled polypropylene film.
- the liquid impermeable layer 36 can be a hydrophobic nonwoven material with water barrier properties such as a nonwoven laminate, an example of which can be a spunbond, meltblown, meltblown, spunbons, four-layered laminate.
- the liquid impermeable layer 36 can be a two layer construction, including an outer layer material and an inner layer material which can be bonded together.
- the outer layer can be any suitable material and may be one that provides a generally cloth-like texture or appearance to the wearer.
- An example of such material can be a 100% polypropylene bonded-carded web with a diamond bond pattern available from Sandler A.G., Germany, such as 30 gsm Sawabond 4185® or equivalent.
- Another example of material suitable for use as an outer layer can be a 20 gsm spunbond polypropylene non-woven web.
- the inner layer can be either vapor permeable (i.e., “breathable”) or vapor impermeable.
- the inner layer may be manufactured from a thin plastic film, although other liquid impermeable materials may also be used.
- the inner layer can inhibit liquid body exudates from leaking out of the absorbent article 10 and wetting articles, such as bed sheets and clothing, as well as the wearer and caregiver.
- An example of a material for an inner layer can be a printed 19 gsm Berry Plastics XP-8695H film or equivalent commercially available from Berry Plastics Corporation, Evansville, Ind., U.S.A.
- the liquid impermeable layer 36 can, therefore, be of a single or multiple layer construction, such as of multiple film layers or laminates of film and nonwoven fibrous layers.
- Suitable liquid impermeable layers 36 can be constructed from materials such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,578,069 to Whitehead, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,799 to Tusim, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,695,849 to Shawver, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,075,179 to McCormack, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 6,376,095 to Cheung, et al., each of which are hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety.
- the absorbent article 10 can have an exudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with the topsheet layer 30 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned on the body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the absorbent core 38 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be made of a material that can be capable of transferring, in the depth direction (Z), body exudates that are delivered to the topsheet layer 30 . Any of a variety of materials can be utilized as the exudate management layer 40 .
- the material can be synthetic, cellulosic, or a combination of synthetic and cellulosic materials.
- the exudate management layer 40 can be constructed from woven or nonwoven materials.
- the exudate management layer 40 can be constructed as an airlaid or a TABCW material.
- airlaid cellulosic tissues may be suitable for use in the exudate management layer 40 .
- the airlaid cellulosic tissue may have a basis weight ranging from about 10 or 100 gsm to about 250 or 300 gsm.
- the airlaid cellulosic tissue can be formed from hardwood and/or softwood fibers.
- An airlaid cellulosic tissue can have a fine pore structure and can provide an excellent wicking capacity.
- a foam material can be utilized to form the exudate management layer 40 .
- the foam material can be an open-cell or porous foam.
- the physical properties of the foam material as well as its wettability and fluid management properties can be tailored to meet the specific characteristics desired for the usage of a foam material in the absorbent article 10 .
- the foam material can be moisture stable and not degrade or collapse and lose its structure and fluid management properties when exposed to body exudate.
- the foam material can be an open-cell foam, a closed cell foam, or a partially open-cell foam that is either a thermoplastic or thermoset material.
- a foam material can be manufactured by extrusion or casting and coating processes including frothed foam, aerated foam, and emulsion foam methods. Such foams can be manufactured from different polymer chemistries to achieve the desired softness, flexibility, and resilience of the foam material when utilized in an absorbent article 10 .
- the foam material can be based on organic or inorganic chemistries and can also be based upon a foam material obtained from natural sources.
- the foam material can have a polymer chemistry which can be a polyurethane foam, polyolefin foam, poly(styrene-butadiene) foam, poly(ethylene-vinyl acetate) foam, or a silicone based foam.
- the viscoelastic properties could be modified to obtain a desired response to applied load from the foam material including properties similar to that commonly referred to as polyurethane memory foam materials.
- the Poisson's ratio of the foam material could be modified to obtain the desired response from the foam material to applied stress and foam materials with auxetic properties could be considered if desired.
- the foam material can have material properties to enable cutting of the foam material such as, for example, with a mechanical die, such as foam materials which are referred to as clickable foams in the polyurethane foam industry.
- the foam material can also be selected to enable other methods of cutting the foam material including, but not limited to, laser die cutting and water jet cutting.
- the foam material can be tailored to enable perforating the foam material utilizing mechanical dies and cutting or hole-punching devices and can also be capable of achieving the perforation utilizing ultrasonic processes.
- a porous foam material can have pores which can vary in size and/or distribution.
- a pore size of a foam material can be from about 10 microns to about 350 microns.
- the foam material can have a multimodal pore size distribution in order to handle a variety of components within the body exudates.
- a multimodal pore size distribution can be achieved within the same monolithic foam structure or could be achieved by using layers of foam material with a narrow pore size distribution which when combined into a single foam material would allow a multimodal pore size distribution to be achieved for the combination of layers.
- the foam material can be a polyester polyurethane foam material.
- the average cell size of the foam material can be from about 100, 150, or 200 microns to about 250, 300, or 350 microns.
- the number of open cells in the foam material can provide the foam material with measurement of the foam material's porosity.
- the porosity of the foam material is measured in pores per linear inch (ppi) and refers to the number of pores in one linear inch of a two-dimensional planar foam material surface and is described by the Polyurethane Foam Association. The pores per linear inch is measured by counting the pores visually under a microscope using a grid. The smaller the ppi value of the foam material the larger the pore size, and vice versa.
- the foam material can have a porosity from about 20 or 40 ppi to about 55, 65, or 90 ppi.
- the foam material can be substantially open-cell or of a completely reticulated structure.
- the reticulation of the foam material can be achieved by several methods known to one skilled in the art include foam made by in-situ reticulation processes during foam formation.
- the reticulated foam material can also be made by treating a substantially open-cell foam material to a high pressure fluid stream to remove the cell walls of the foam material.
- foam materials are capable of stretching, however, in various embodiments the foam material can have a reduced elongation capacity.
- the foam material can have a low elongation, such as, for example, less than a 200% elongation at break. In various embodiments, the foam material has an elongation at break from about 80 or 100% to about 150 or 200%. In various embodiments, the basis weight of the foam material can be from about 45 gsm to about 50 or 55 gsm. In various embodiments, the density of the foam material can be from about 0.01, 0.02 or 0.03 g/cc to about 0.05 or 0.08 g/cc.
- the foam material can also have a compression modulus that allows it to be soft and flexible when used in an absorbent article. In various embodiments, the foam material can have a compression force deflection at 25% deflection from about 0.5 or 0.6 psi to about 0.8 or 1.0 psi.
- the foam material can be either hydrophilic or hydrophobic dependent upon the desired properties of the foam material in the absorbent article 10 .
- the foam material can be a hydrophilic foam material.
- the foam material can be hydrophobic and can be treated with a surfactant to create a hydrophilic foam material.
- the material utilized to form the exudate management layer 40 can be a hydrophobic, open-cell, polyurethane foam treated with from about 0.3% or 0.8% to about 1.6, 2.0, or 3.0% of a surfactant.
- the surfactant utilized to treat the foam material can be a nonionic surfactant such as a nonionic surfactant comprising at least an ethoxylated linear oleochemical alcohol such as an alkylphenol ethoxylate, such as LUTENSOL® A65N, commercially available from BASF, or an ethoxylated acetylenic diol such as SURFYNOL® 465, commercially available from Air Products, Allentown, Pa.
- the hydrophilicity of the foam material, as a result of the surfactant treatment can be uniform in the longitudinal direction (X) and the transverse direction (Y) of the foam material.
- the hydrophilicity of the foam material can vary in the longitudinal direction (X), in the transverse direction (Y), or in both of the longitudinal direction (X) and the transverse direction (Y).
- the polymer utilized to formulate the foam material can be selected to have the desired hydrophilic properties. In various embodiments, this can be achieved by using an inherently hydrophilic polymer that is wettable by aqueous fluids or by including additives in the polymer during formation of the foam material. These additives can make the foam material wettable to aqueous fluids even if the base polymer of the foam material is hydrophobic.
- a non-limiting example of such an approach can be to include polyethylene glycol as an additive with a hydrophobic polymer.
- the foam material can be hydrophobic and can have hydrophilic fibers inserted into the foam material to create a hydrophilic foam and fiber composite.
- the hydrophilic fibers within the foam material can provide a hydrophilic pathway through the foam material to direct body exudates through the foam material.
- FIGS. 13 , 14 , and 15 FIG. 13 is a photomicrograph (taken by scanning electron microscope at a magnification of 100 ⁇ ) of a cross-sectional view of a portion of a foam and fiber composite material 100 suitable for use as the exudate management layer 40
- FIG. 14 is a photomicrograph (taken by scanning electron microscope at a magnification of 40 ⁇ ) of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite material 100 of FIG.
- FIG. 15 is a photomicrograph (taken by scanning electron microscope at a magnification of 40 X) of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite 100 of FIG. 13 such that the second planar surface of the foam material and portions of fibers are visible to the viewer.
- the foam and fiber composite material 100 can be formed of an open-cell foam material 110 and a fibrous material 120 .
- the foam material 110 can have a first planar surface 112 and a second planar surface 114 .
- each planar surface, 112 and 114 have been delineated by the corresponding broken lines for visual clarity.
- a layer of fibrous material 120 is in contact with one of the planar surfaces, such as planar surface 112 , of the foam material 110 .
- the layer of fibrous material 120 is formed from a plurality of individual fibers 122 .
- a portion of the individual fibers 122 can extend from the fibrous material 120 and through the foam material 110 from the first planar surface 112 of the foam material 110 to the second planar surface 114 of the foam material 110 .
- the foam and fiber composite 100 can have a total basis weight from about 20 gsm to about 250 gsm.
- the amount of fibrous material 120 is at least about 10% of the total basis weight of the foam and fiber composite 100 . In various embodiments, at least about 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 or 70 gsm of fibrous material 120 is brought into contact with a planar surface, such as planar surface 112 of the foam material 110 . In various embodiments, the fibrous material 120 can be formed from a plurality of individual fibers 122 . In various embodiments, the individual fibers 122 of the fibrous material 120 can be a loose configuration such as may occur with wet-laying or air-laying of the fibrous material 120 .
- the individual fibers 122 of the fibrous material 120 can be in the form of a nonwoven web of material such as, for example, a carded nonwoven web.
- the fibrous material 120 can, therefore, be manufactured via various processes such as, but not limited to, air-laying, wet-laying, and carding.
- the fibers 122 forming the fibrous material 120 can be hydrophilic.
- the fibers 122 can be naturally hydrophilic or can be fibers which are naturally hydrophobic but which have been treated to be hydrophilic, such as, for example, via a treatment with a surfactant. Providing hydrophilic fibers 122 can allow for a foam and fiber composite 100 which can have hydrophilic pathways through the foam material 110 .
- the hydrophilic pathways provided by the hydrophilic fibers 122 can allow for the foam and fiber composite 100 in an absorbent article 10 to intake bodily exudates (via the hydrophilic fiber pathways) and maintain the body exudates in a location away from the topsheet layer 30 of the absorbent article 10 as the body exudates will not be able to readily pass through the hydrophobic foam material 110 .
- the fibers 122 forming the fibrous material 120 can be cellulosic fibers such as, but not limited to, cotton, ramie, jute, hemp, flax, bagasse, northern softwood kraft pulp, as well as synthetic cellulosic fibers such as, but not limited to, rayon, viscose, and cellulosic acetate.
- the fibers 122 forming the fibrous material 120 can be synthetic fibers made from polymers such as polyethylene, polypropylene, aromatic polyesters, aliphatic polyesters, and polyamides. In such embodiments, the fibers 122 can be treated with additives to impart various degrees of surface energy ranging from very low surface energy and low wettability to high surface energy and high wettability.
- the exudate management layer 40 is formed from a base sheet of material, such as any of the materials described above, and is configured to have a first component 50 which at least partially defines an opening 42 for direct passage of body exudates into the absorbent core 38 and a second component 60 connected to the first component 50 .
- the first component 50 can provide the exudate management layer 40 with a first height dimension 76 and the second component 60 can provide the exudate management layer 40 with a second height dimension 78 that can be greater than the first height dimension 76 .
- the first component 50 of the exudate management layer 40 can have a first transverse direction end edge 52 , a second transverse direction end edge 54 , and an opposing pair of longitudinal direction side edges 56 extending between and connecting the transverse direction end edges, 52 and 54 .
- the first component 50 can generally have any shape and/or size desired.
- the first component 50 can have a rectangular shape, a curved rectangular shape, an oval shape, an elliptical shape, a circular shape, an hourglass shape, a square shape, or a curved square shape.
- each of the edges, 52 , 54 , and 56 , of the first component 50 can be straight.
- At least one of the edges, 52 , 54 , or 56 , of the first component 50 can be arcuate and the remaining edges can be straight. In various embodiments, at least two of the edges, 52 , 54 , or 56 , of the first component 50 can be arcuate and the remaining edges can be straight. In various embodiments, for example, the longitudinal direction side edges 56 of the first component 50 can be straight and the transverse direction end edges, 52 and 54 , can be arcuate. In various embodiments, the transverse direction end edges, 52 and 54 , can have an arcuate shape which can form a complementary configuration with each other if the two edges, 52 and 54 , were to be brought together.
- At least three of the edges, 52 , 54 , or 56 , of the first component 50 can be arcuate and the remaining edge can be straight. In various embodiments, all of the edges, 52 , 54 , and 56 , of the first component 50 can be arcuate.
- the first component 50 can have a longitudinal direction length as measured from the first transverse direction end edge 52 to the second transverse direction end edge 54 which can be less than the overall length of the absorbent article 10 .
- the first component 50 can have a longitudinal length between about 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60 mm to about 100, 150, 175, 200, 250, or 300 mm.
- the first component 50 can have a longitudinal direction length that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the longitudinal length of the absorbent article 10 .
- the first component 50 can have a transverse width as measured form a first longitudinal direction side edge 56 to a second longitudinal direction side edge 56 which can be equal to or less than the overall width of the absorbent article 10 .
- the first component 50 can have a transverse width between about 10, 15, 20, or 30 mm to about 60, 80, 100, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 140, or 150 mm.
- the first component 50 can have a transverse width that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, of 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the transverse width of the absorbent article 10 .
- the first component 50 has a body facing surface 72 and a garment facing surface 74 .
- the first component 50 can provide the exudate management layer 40 with a first height dimension 76 in the depth direction (Z) of the exudate management layer 40 .
- the first height dimension 76 can be from about 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, or 3.5 mm to about 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, or 10 mm.
- the first component 50 of the exudate management layer 40 can have an opening 42 which can be any suitable shape, such as, but not limited to, ovular, circular, rectangular, square, elliptical, hourglass, triangular, etc.
- the shape of the opening 42 can include a shape of a physical object, such as, for example, the outer shape of a leaf, an animal, a star, a heart, a tear drop, a moon, or an abstract configuration.
- the opening 42 in the first component 50 can be elongate and can be oriented in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 42 can be bounded at least partially by a perimeter 44 , which can form an inner border or inner edge of the first component 50 , and bounded at least partially by a primary fold 70 connecting the first component 50 to a second component 60 of the exudate management layer 40 .
- the opening 42 passes through the first component 50 from the body facing surface 72 of the first component to the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 .
- the opening 42 can form a cup or well-like structure for holding body exudates and preventing its leakage away from a region of the absorbent article 10 and towards the edges of the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 42 can be located at various positions along the longitudinal and transverse directions of the absorbent article 10 depending upon the primary location of body exudate intake within the absorbent article 10 . This variability in positioning allows the opening 42 to be positioned below the main point of body exudate discharge so that it can act as the primary body exudate receiving area for the absorbent article 10 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have a longitudinal centerline 18 and a transverse centerline 80 .
- the longitudinal centerline 18 is disposed at a distance that is equidistant from the longitudinal direction side edges 24 and runs the length of the absorbent article 10 in the longitudinal direction (X), while the transverse centerline 80 is disposed at a location that is equidistant from the first transverse direction end edge 20 and the second transverse direction end edge 22 and runs along the width of the absorbent article 10 in the transverse direction (Y).
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned so that it is in symmetrical alignment with the longitudinal centerline 18 and the transverse centerline 80 of the absorbent article 10 . This allows the opening 42 to be centrally disposed within the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 may be either symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 only or may not be symmetrical about either the longitudinal centerline 18 or the transverse centerline 80 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 may be symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 and asymmetrical about the transverse centerline 80 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 may be asymmetrical about each of the longitudinal centerline 18 and the transverse centerline 80 . In various embodiments, the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned between the transverse centerline 80 and the posterior region 14 transverse direction end edge 22 of the absorbent article 10 . In such embodiments, the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 may or may not be symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 .
- the opening 42 in the exudate management layer 40 can have a longitudinal length from about 15, 20, 30, or 50 mm to about 60, 75, 100, or 150 mm and can have a transverse width from about 10, 15, 20, or 30 mm to about 40, 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, or 130 mm.
- the opening 42 in the exudate management layer 40 can have a longitudinal length that is from about 15, 20, or 25% to about 70, 75, or 80% of the overall longitudinal length of the first component 50 in the longitudinal direction (X).
- the opening 42 in the exudate management layer 40 can have a transverse width that can be from about 20, 25, or 30% to about 70, 75, or 80% of the overall width of the first component 50 in the transverse direction (Y).
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 can be sized as deemed suitable for the receipt and isolation of fecal material within the absorbent article 10 .
- the exudate management layer 40 has a second component 60 which is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 is formed from the same base sheet of material forming the first component 50 of the exudate management layer 40 and is connected to the first component 50 via a primary fold 70 in the material forming the exudate management layer 40 .
- the second component 60 of the exudate management layer 40 extends from the primary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 in a direction towards the posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the second component 60 can help shape the absorbent article 10 , create a close-to-body fit, and absorb fluid from a wearer's buttock's region.
- the second component 60 can extend beyond the second transverse direction end edge 54 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 may not extend beyond the second transverse direction end edge 54 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 can have a first transverse direction end edge 62 which is coextensive with the primary fold 70 , a second transverse direction end edge 64 and an opposing pair of longitudinal direction side edges 66 extending between and connecting the transverse direction end edges, 62 and 64 .
- the second component 60 can generally have any shape and/or size desired.
- the second component 60 is created by cutting, punching, or otherwise separating the material forming the second component 60 from the material forming the first component 50 . Such cutting, punching, or otherwise separating of the second component 60 from the first component 50 will result in the perimeter 44 which at least partially defines the opening 42 in the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 is positioned into an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 by incorporating a primary fold 70 into the material forming the exudate management layer 40 .
- the second component 60 is not fully separated from the first component 50 and remains attached to the first component 50 via the primary fold 70 .
- the second component 60 can have a shape and size which can be considered a mate of and is complementary to the shape and size of the opening 42 .
- the second component 60 therefore, when not in an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 , can fit entirely within the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 and the edges, 64 and 66 , of the second component 60 can be adjacent to the perimeter 44 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 can be smaller in dimension than the opening 42 , such as, for example, if the second component 60 is further reduced in size dimension.
- the second component 60 can fit entirely within the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 but the edges of the second component 60 may not be adjacent to the perimeter 44 of the first component 50 .
- a portion of the second component 60 may be removed from the second component 60 as part of the cutting or punching to form the second component 60 such that the second component 60 is not a perfect mate or is not exactly complementary to the shape and size of the opening 42 .
- the second component 60 can have a longitudinal length from about 15, 20, 30, or 50 mm to about 60, 75, 100, or 150 mm and can have a transverse width from about 10, 15, 20, or 30 mm to about 40, 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, or 130 mm. In various embodiments, the second component 60 can have a longitudinal direction length that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the longitudinal length of the first component 50 . In various embodiments, the second component 60 can have a transverse width that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the transverse width of the first component 50 .
- the second transverse direction end edge 64 of the second component 60 can be from about 15 mm to about 75 mm from the second transverse direction end edge 22 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the second component 60 can provide a height dimension 78 to the exudate management layer 40 and the second height dimension 78 , in the depth direction (Z), can be from about 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, or 10 mm to about 10.5, 11, 11.5, 12, 12.5, 13, 13.5, 14, 14.5, 15, 15.5, 16, 16.5, 17, 17.5, 18, 18.5, 19, 19.5, or 20 mm.
- the first component 50 and the second component 60 can be in an at least partially overlapping configuration with each other.
- the second component 60 can overlap a portion of the first component 50 such that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 .
- the portion of the second component 60 in contact with the portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 can be bonded to each other such as, for example, by adhesive bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, etc.
- FIGS. 3 , 4 A, 4 B, 8 A, and 8 B provide exemplary illustrations of embodiments in which the second component 60 overlaps a portion of the first component 50 so that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 can underlap a portion of the first component 50 such that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 .
- the portion of the second component 60 in contact with the portion of the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 can be bonded to each other such as, for example, by adhesive bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, etc.
- FIGS. 3 , 4 A, and 4 B provide an exemplary illustration of an absorbent article 10 having an exudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with the topsheet layer 30 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the exudate management layer 40 is positioned on the body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is positioned such that the opening 42 is symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 but not symmetrical about the transverse centerline 80 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 illustrated in FIGS. 3 , 4 A, and 4 B is positioned between the transverse centerline 80 and the posterior region 14 transverse direction end edge 22 .
- the transverse width of the first component 50 is uniform in the longitudinal direction of the first component 50 .
- the exudate management layer 40 is configured such that the second component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that a portion of the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape.
- FIGS. 5 , 6 A, and 6 B provide an exemplary illustration of an absorbent article 10 having an exudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with the topsheet layer 30 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the exudate management layer 40 is positioned on the body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is positioned such that the opening 42 is symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 but not symmetrical about the transverse centerline 80 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 illustrated in FIGS. 5 , 6 A, and 6 B is positioned between the transverse centerline 80 and the posterior region 14 transverse direction end edge 22 .
- the transverse width of the first component 50 is uniform in the longitudinal direction of the first component 50 .
- the exudate management layer 40 is configured such that the second component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that a portion of the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape.
- FIG. 7 provides an exemplary illustration of an absorbent article 10 having an exudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with the topsheet layer 30 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the exudate management layer is positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the absorbent core 38 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be in contact with the garment facing surface 34 of the topsheet layer 30 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is positioned such that the opening 42 is symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 but not symmetrical about the transverse centerline 80 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is positioned between the transverse centerline 80 and the posterior region 14 transverse direction end edge 22 .
- FIGS. 8 A and 8 B provide exemplary illustrations of an embodiment of an exudate management layer 40 which can be present in the absorbent article 10 of FIG. 7 .
- the exudate management layer is configured such that the second component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that a portion of the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape.
- FIGS. 9 A and 9 B provide exemplary illustrations of an embodiment of an exudate management layer 40 which can be present in the absorbent article 10 of FIG. 7 .
- the exudate management layer is configured such that the second component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that a portion of the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 .
- the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape.
- the second component 60 can have a secondary fold 68 .
- the secondary fold 68 can be a fold within the second component 60 and can bring a first portion 82 of the second component 60 into contact with a second portion 84 of the second component 60 .
- FIGS. 16 A- 16 D provide exemplary illustrations of cross-sectional side views taken in the longitudinal direction of exemplary exudate management layers 40 in which the second component 60 has a secondary fold 68 .
- the exudate management layer 40 illustrated in FIGS. 16 A- 16 D has a first component 50 connected to a second component 60 via the primary fold 70 and wherein the first component 50 and the second component 60 are in a partially overlapping configuration. Referring to FIG.
- the second component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 further has a secondary fold 68 which brings a first portion 82 of the second component 60 into contact with a second portion 84 of the second component 60 .
- the first portion 82 can be in an underlapping configuration with the second portion 84 of the second component 60 .
- the second component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the body facing surface 72 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 further has a secondary fold 68 which brings a first portion 82 of the second component 60 into contact with a second portion 84 of the second component 60 .
- the first portion 82 can be in an overlapping configuration with the second portion 84 of the second component 60 .
- the second component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 further has a secondary fold 68 which brings a first portion 82 of the second component 60 into contact with a second portion 84 of the second component 60 .
- the first portion 82 can be in an overlapping configuration with the second portion 84 of the second component 60 . Referring to FIG.
- the second component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with the first component 50 such that the second component 60 is in contact with a portion of the garment facing surface 74 of the first component 50 .
- the second component 60 further has a secondary fold 68 which brings a first portion 82 of the second component 60 into contact with a second portion 84 of the second component. While the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 16 A- 16 D illustrate a single secondary fold 68 in the second components 60 , it is to be understood that the second component 68 can have more than one secondary fold 68 . While the embodiments illustrated in FIGS.
- 16 A- 16 D illustrate the secondary fold 68 of the second component 60 to be in a location beyond the second transverse direction end edge 54 of the first component 50 , it is to be understood that the secondary fold 68 can occur close in proximity to the second transverse direction end edge 54 of the first component 50 or can occur such that the resulting overlapping configuration of a first portion 82 and second portion 84 of the second component 60 can occur in an overlapping configuration with the first component 50 of the exudate management layer 40 .
- the second component 60 of the exudate management layer 40 can have at least one opening 88 which can be any suitable shape, such as, but not limited to, ovular, circular, rectangular, square, elliptical, hourglass, triangle, etc.
- the shape of the opening 88 can include a shape of a physical object, such as, for example, the outer shape of a leaf, an animal, a star, a heart, a tear drop, a moon, or an abstract configuration.
- the opening 88 can be elongate and can be oriented in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 88 can be bounded by a perimeter 90 which can form an inner border or inner edge of the second component 60 .
- the opening 88 in the second component 60 can pass through the second component 60 from the body facing surface of the second component 60 to the garment facing surface of the second component 60 .
- the opening 88 can form a cup or well-like structure for holding body exudate and preventing its leakage away from a region of the absorbent article 10 and towards the edges of the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 88 can be located at various positions of the second component 60 .
- the second component 60 can have more than one opening 88 and the plurality of openings 88 can be arranged in the second component 60 in any manner deemed suitable.
- the opening 88 can be formed by cutting, punching, or otherwise separating a first portion of the material forming the second component 60 from a second portion of material forming the second component 60 .
- the second portion of material forming the second component 60 is that portion of material which remains as the second component 60 of the exudate management layer 40 and is connected to the first component 50 via the primary fold 70 .
- the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming the second component 60 can be discarded.
- the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming the second component 60 can be bonded to the absorbent core 38 and can form projection(s) 86 extending upward, in the depth direction (Z) from the body facing surface of the absorbent core 38 .
- the material forming the projection(s) 86 can be bonded to the absorbent core 38 prior to or after the cutting, punching, or otherwise separating the first portion of material forming the second component 60 from the second portion of material forming the second component 60 .
- the absorbent core 38 can have at least one opening 94 which can be any suitable shape, such as, but not limited to, ovular, circular, rectangular, square, elliptical, hourglass, triangle, etc.
- the shape of the opening 94 can include a shape of a physical object, such as, for example, the outer shape of a leaf, an animal, a star, a heart, a tear drop, a moon, or an abstract configuration.
- the opening 94 can be elongate and can be oriented in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 94 can be bounded by a perimeter 96 which can form an inner border or inner edge of the absorbent core 38 .
- the opening 94 in the absorbent core 38 passes through the absorbent core 38 from the body facing surface of the absorbent core 38 to the garment facing surface of the absorbent core 38 .
- the opening 94 can form a cup or well-like structure for holding the body exudate and preventing its leakage away from a region of the absorbent article 10 and towards the edges of the absorbent article 10 .
- the opening 94 can be located at various positions of the absorbent core 38 and within the region of the absorbent core 38 visible through the opening 42 of the exudate management layer 40 .
- the absorbent core 38 can have more than one opening 94 and the plurality of openings 94 can be arranged in the absorbent core 38 in any manner deemed suitable.
- the opening 94 in the absorbent core 38 can be formed by cutting, punching, or otherwise separating a first portion of material forming the absorbent core 38 from a second portion of material forming the absorbent core 38 .
- the second portion of material forming the absorbent core 38 is that portion of material which remains as the absorbent core 38 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming the absorbent core 38 can be discarded.
- the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming the absorbent core 38 can be bonded to the second component 60 of the exudate management layer 40 and can form projection(s) 92 extending upward, in the depth direction (Z) from the body facing surface of the second component 60 .
- the material forming the projection(s) 92 can be bonded to the second component 60 prior to or after the cutting, punching, or otherwise separating of the second component 60 from the first component 50 of the exudate management layer 40 .
- the exudate management layer 40 has a first component 50 which at least partially defines an opening 42 and a second component 60 connected to the first component 50 via a primary fold 70 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can have a third component connected to the first component 50 via a third component primary fold.
- the exudate management layer 40 can have a third component and a fourth component wherein each of the third component and fourth component is connected to the first component 50 via their own component primary folds.
- the exudate management layer 40 can have a third component, a fourth component, and a fifth component connected to the first component 50 via their own component primary folds. Referring to FIG. 19 , FIG.
- FIG. 19 provides an exemplary illustration of an exudate management layer 40 having a first component 50 , a second component 60 connected to the first component 50 via primary fold 70 , a third component 130 connected to the first component 50 via third component primary fold 132 , and an opening 42 defined by the first component 50 , the primary fold 70 , and the third component primary fold 132 .
- the second component 60 can extend from the primary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 in a direction towards the posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10 and the third component 130 can extend from the third component primary fold 132 in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 in a direction towards the anterior region 12 of the absorbent article 10 .
- FIG. 20 provides an exemplary illustration of an exudate management layer 40 having a first component 50 , a second component 60 connected to the first component 50 via primary fold 70 , a third component 142 connected to the first component via third component primary fold 144 , a fourth component 146 connected to the first component 50 via fourth component primary fold 148 , and an opening 42 defined by the first component 50 , the primary fold 70 , the third component primary fold 144 , and the fourth component primary fold 148 .
- the second component 60 can extend from the primary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 in a direction towards the posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10
- the third component 142 can extend from the third component primary fold 144 in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10
- the fourth component 146 can extend from the fourth component primary fold 148 in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 .
- 21 provides an exemplary illustration of an exudate management layer 40 having a first component 50 , a second component 60 connected to the first component 50 via primary fold 70 , a third component 130 connected to the first component 50 via third component primary fold 132 , a fourth component 134 connected to the first component 50 via fourth component primary fold 136 , a fifth component 138 connected to the first component 50 via fifth component primary fold 140 , and an opening 42 defined by the first component 50 , the primary fold 70 , the third component primary fold 132 , the fourth component primary fold 136 , and the fifth component primary fold 140 .
- the second component 60 can extend from the primary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 in a direction towards the posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10
- the third component 130 can extend from the third component primary fold 132 in the longitudinal direction (X) of the absorbent article 10 in a direction towards the anterior region 12 of the absorbent article 10
- the fourth component 134 can extend from the fourth component primary fold 136 in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10
- the fifth component 138 can extend from the fifth component primary fold 140 in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can have at least two openings 42 for the capture and containment of fecal material.
- the exudate management layer 40 can have at least 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 openings 42 .
- Each of the openings 42 can have any shape deemed suitable such as, for example, described herein.
- Each of the openings 42 can be bounded at least partially by a perimeter 44 and at least partially by a primary fold 70 of their respective second component 60 .
- the plurality of openings 42 can be arranged in the exudate management layer 40 in any manner deemed suitable. In various embodiments, at least one of the plurality of openings 42 can be symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 .
- none of the openings 42 is symmetrical about the longitudinal centerline 18 .
- one of the plurality of openings 42 can be positioned that that a portion of the opening 42 crosses over the transverse centerline 80 .
- each of the openings 42 is positioned between the transverse centerline 80 and the second transverse direction end edge 22 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the absorbent article can have containment flaps.
- FIGS. 2 , 3 , 5 , and 7 provide illustrations of exemplary embodiments of an absorbent article 10 with containment flaps, 210 and 212 .
- containment flaps, 210 and 212 can be secured to the topsheet layer 30 of the absorbent article 10 in a generally parallel, spaced relation with each other laterally inward of the longitudinal direction side edges 24 to provide a barrier against the flow of body exudates in the transverse direction (Y) of the absorbent article 10 .
- the containment flaps, 210 and 212 can extend longitudinally from the anterior region 12 of the absorbent article 10 , through the central region 16 to the posterior region 14 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the containment flaps, 210 and 212 can be constructed of a fibrous material which can be similar to the material forming the topsheet layer 30 . Other conventional material, such as polymer films, can also be employed.
- Each containment flap, 210 and 212 can have a moveable distal end 214 which can include flap elastics 216 .
- Suitable elastic materials for the flap elastics 216 can include sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric materials.
- the flap elastics 216 can have two strands of elastomeric material extending longitudinally along the distal ends 214 of the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , in generally parallel, spaced relation with each other.
- the elastic strands can be within the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , while in an elastically contractible condition such that contraction of the strands gathers and shortens the distal ends 214 of the containment flaps, 210 and 212 .
- the elastic strands can bias the distal ends 214 of each containment flap, 210 and 212 , toward a position spaced from the proximal end of the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , so that the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , can extend away from the topsheet layer 30 in a generally upright orientation of the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , especially in the central region 16 of the absorbent article 10 , when the absorbent article 10 is fitted on the wearer.
- the distal end 214 of the containment flaps, 210 and 212 can be connected to the flap elastics 216 by partially doubling the containment flap, 210 and 212 , material back upon itself by an amount which can be sufficient to enclose the flap elastics 216 . It is to be understood, however, that the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , can have any number of strands of elastomeric material and may also be omitted from the absorbent article 10 without departing from the scope of this disclosure.
- the absorbent article 10 can have an exudate management layer 40 positioned on the body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be sized and positioned such that the longitudinal direction side edges 56 of the first component 50 of the exudate management layer 40 are located underneath the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , of the absorbent article 10 .
- portions of the first component 50 such as, for example, at least portions of the longitudinal direction side edges 56 , can be bonded to the containment flaps, 210 and 212 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be elevated away from the topsheet layer 30 and provide a close to body fit of the absorbent article 10 to the body of the wearer.
- the transverse direction end edges, 52 ad 54 , of the first component 50 can be bonded to the topsheet layer 30 so as to create a pocket for the body exudate when the exudate management layer 40 is elevated away from the topsheet layer 30 as the containment flaps, 210 and 212 , are in a generally upright orientation during usage of the absorbent article 10 .
- the absorbent article 10 can have an acquisition layer.
- the acquisition layer can help decelerate and diffuse surges or gushes of liquid body exudates penetrating the topsheet layer 30 .
- the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned on the body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 and the acquisition layer can be positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the absorbent core 38 .
- the acquisition layer can be positioned on the body facing surface 32 of the topsheet layer 30 and the exudate management layer 40 can be positioned on the body facing surface of the acquisition layer.
- an absorbent article 10 can have an exudate management layer 40 positioned between the topsheet layer 30 and the absorbent core 38 with an acquisition layer positioned between the exudate management layer 40 and the absorbent core 38 .
- the acquisition layer may have any longitudinal length dimension as deemed suitable.
- the longitudinal length of the acquisition layer can be the same as the longitudinal length of the absorbent core 38 .
- the longitudinal length of the acquisition layer can be shorter than the longitudinal length of the absorbent core 38 .
- the acquisition layer may be positioned at any desired location along the longitudinal length of the absorbent core 38 .
- the acquisition layer can include natural fibers, synthetic fibers, superabsorbent material, woven material, nonwoven material, wet-laid fibrous webs, a substantially unbounded airlaid fibrous web, an operatively bonded, stabilized-airlaid fibrous web, or the like, as well as combinations thereof.
- the acquisition layer can be formed from a material that is substantially hydrophobic, such as a nonwoven web composed of polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, and the like, and combinations thereof.
- the acquisition layer can include conjugate, biconstituent, and/or homopolymer fibers of staple or other lengths and mixtures of such fibers with other types of fibers.
- the acquisition layer can have fibers which can have a denier of greater than about 5. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer can have fibers which can have a denier of less than about 5.
- the acquisition layer can be a bonded carded web or an airlaid web.
- the bonded carded web may be, for example, a powder bonded carded web, an infrared bonded carded web, or a through air bonded carded web.
- the basis weight of the acquisition layer can be at least about 10 or 20 gsm. In various embodiments, the basis weight of the acquisition layer can be from about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 or 60 gsm to about 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 110, 120, or 130 gsm. In various embodiments, the basis weight of the acquisition layer can be less than about 130, 120, 110, 100, 90, 85, 80, 75, 70, 65, 60 or 50 gsm.
- FIG. 23 provides an illustration of an exemplary embodiment of a perspective view of an absorbent article 10 such as a pant, such as, for example, a training pant, youth pant, diaper pant, or an adult incontinence pant.
- the absorbent article 10 may have front side panels, 260 and 262 , and rear side panels, 264 and 266 .
- FIG. 23 provides a non-limiting illustration of an absorbent article 10 that can have side panels, such as front side panels, 260 and 262 , and rear side panels, 264 and 266 .
- the front side panels 260 and 262 and the rear side panels 264 and 266 of the absorbent article 10 can be bonded to the absorbent article 10 in the respective anterior and posterior regions, 12 and 14 , and can extend outwardly beyond the longitudinal side edges 24 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the front side panels, 260 and 262 can be bonded to the liquid impermeable layer 36 such as being bonded thereto by adhesive, by pressure bonding, by thermal bonding or by ultrasonic bonding.
- the back side panels, 264 and 266 may be secured to the liquid impermeable layer 36 in substantially the same manner as the front side panels, 260 and 262 .
- the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and the back side panels, 264 and 266 may be formed integrally with the absorbent article 10 , such as by being formed integrally with the liquid impermeable layer 36 , the topsheet layer 30 or other layers of the absorbent article 10 .
- the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and the back side panels, 264 and 266 can suitably have an average length measured parallel to the longitudinal centerline 18 of the absorbent article 10 that is about 20 percent or greater, and more suitably about 25 percent or greater, of the overall length of the absorbent article 10 , also measured parallel to the longitudinal centerline 18 .
- absorbent articles 10 having an overall length of about 54 centimeters, the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and the back side panels, 264 and 266 suitably have an average length of about 10 centimeters or greater, and more suitably have an average length of about 15 centimeters.
- Each of the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and back side panels, 264 and 266 can be constructed of one or more individual, distinct pieces of material.
- each front side panel, 260 and 262 , and back side panel, 264 and 266 can include first and second side panel portions (not shown) joined at a seam (not shown), with at least one of the portions including an elastomeric material.
- each individual front side panel, 260 and 262 , and back side panel, 264 and 266 can be constructed of a single piece of material folded over upon itself along an intermediate fold line (not shown).
- the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and back side panels, 264 and 266 can each have an outer edge 270 spaced laterally from the engagement seam 272 , a leg end edge 274 disposed toward the longitudinal center of the absorbent article 10 , and a waist end edge 276 disposed toward a longitudinal end of the absorbent article 10 .
- the leg end edge 274 and waist end edge 276 can extend from the longitudinal side edges 24 of the absorbent article 10 to the outer edges 270 .
- the leg end edges 274 of the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and back side panels, 264 and 266 can form part of the longitudinal side edges 24 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the leg end edges 274 of the illustrated absorbent article 10 can be curved and/or angled relative to the transverse centerline 80 to provide a better fit around the wearer's legs. However, it is understood that only one of the leg end edges 274 can be curved or angled, such as the leg end edge 274 of the posterior region 14 , or neither of the leg end edges 274 can be curved or angled, without departing from the scope of this disclosure.
- the waist end edges 276 can be parallel to the transverse centerline 80 .
- the waist end edges 276 of the front side panels, 260 and 262 can form part of the first transverse direction end edge 20 of the absorbent article 10
- the waist end edges 276 of the back side panels, 264 and 266 can form part of the second transverse direction end edge 22 of the absorbent article 10 .
- the front side panels, 260 and 262 , and back side panels, 264 and 266 can include an elastic material capable of stretching laterally.
- Suitable elastic materials, as well as one described process for incorporating elastic front side panels, 260 and 262 , and back side panels, 264 and 266 , into an absorbent article 10 are described in the following U.S. Pat. No. 4,940,464 issued Jul. 10, 1990 to Van Gompel et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,224,405 issued Jul. 6, 1993 to Pohjola, U.S. Pat. No. 5,104,116 issued Apr. 14, 1992 to Pohjola, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,046,272 issued Sep.
- suitable elastic materials include a stretch-thermal laminate (STL), a neck-bonded laminate (NBL), a reversibly necked laminate, or a stretch-bonded laminate (SBL) material.
- STL stretch-thermal laminate
- NBL neck-bonded laminate
- SBL stretch-bonded laminate
- front side panels, 260 and 262 , and back side panels, 264 and 266 may include other woven or non-woven materials, such as those described above as being suitable for the liquid impermeable layer 36 .
- the percentage of open area can be determined by using the image analysis measurement method described herein.
- the open area is considered the regions within a material where light transmitted from a light source passes directly thru those regions unhindered in the material of interest.
- the image analysis method determines a numeric value of percent open area for a material via specific image analysis measurement parameters such as area.
- the percent open area method is performed using conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect open area regions in both land areas and projections separately and then calculating their percentages in each.
- incident lighting is used along with image processing steps.
- An image analysis system controlled by an algorithm, performs detection, image processing and measurement and also transmits data digitally to a spreadsheet database. The resulting measurement data are used to determine the percent open area of materials possessing land areas and projections.
- the method for determining the percent open area in both land areas and projections of a given material includes the step of acquiring two separate digital images of the material.
- An exemplary setup for acquiring the image is representatively illustrated in FIG. 24 .
- a CCD video camera 300 e.g., a Leica DFC 310 FX video camera operated in gray scale mode and available from Leica Microsystems of Heerbrugg, Switzerland
- a standard support 302 such as a Polaroid MP-4 Land Camera standard support or equivalent available from Polaroid Resource Center in Cambridge, Miss.
- the standard support 302 is attached to a macro-viewer 304 such as a KREONITE macro-viewer available from Dunning Photo Equipment, Inc., having an office in Bixby, Okla.
- An auto stage 308 is placed on the upper surface 306 of the macro-viewer 304 .
- the auto stage 308 is used to automatically move the position of a given material for viewing by the camera 300 .
- a suitable auto stage is Model H112, available from Prior Scientific Inc., having an office in Rockland, Mass.
- the material possessing land areas and projections is placed on the auto stage 308 under the optical axis of a 60 mm Nikon AF Micro Nikkor lens 310 with an f-stop setting of 4.
- the Nikon lens 310 is attached to the Leica DFC 310 FX camera 300 using a c-mount adaptor.
- the distance D 1 from the front face 312 of the Nikon lens 310 to the material is 21 cm.
- the material is laid flat on the auto stage 308 and any wrinkles removed by gentle stretching and/or fastening it to the auto stage 308 surface using transparent adhesive tape at its outer edges.
- the material is oriented so the machine-direction (MD) runs in the horizontal direction of the resulting image.
- MD machine-direction
- the material surface is illuminated with incident fluorescent lighting provided by a 16 inch diameter, 40 watt, GE Circline fluorescent lamp 314 .
- the lamp 314 is contained in a fixture that is positioned so it is centered over the material and under the video camera above and is a distance D 2 of 3 inches above the material surface.
- the illumination level of the lamp 314 is controlled with a Variable Auto-transformer, type 3PN1010, available from Staco Energy Products Co. having an office in Dayton, Ohio Transmitted light is also provided to the material from beneath the auto stage 308 by a bank of five 20 watt fluorescent lights 316 covered with a diffusing plate 318 .
- the diffusing plate 318 is inset into, and forms a portion of, the upper surface 306 of the macro-viewer 304 .
- the diffusing plate 318 is overlaid with a black mask 320 possessing a 3-inch by 3-inch opening 322 .
- the opening 322 is positioned so that it is centered under the optical axis of the Leica camera and lens system.
- the distance D 3 from the opening 322 to the surface of the auto stage 308 is approximately 17 cm.
- the illumination level of the fluorescent light bank 316 is also controlled with a separate Variable Auto-transformer.
- the image analysis software platform used to perform the percent open area measurements is a QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, having an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland.
- the system and images are also calibrated using the QWIN software and a standard ruler with metric markings at least as small as one millimeter.
- the calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Units of millimeters per pixel are used for the calibration.
- the method for determining the percent open area of a given material includes the step of performing several area measurements from both incident and transmitted light images. Specifically, an image analysis algorithm is used to acquire and process images as well as perform measurements using Quantimet User Interactive Programming System (QUIPS) language. The image analysis algorithm is reproduced below.
- QUIPS Quantimet User Interactive Programming System
- NAME % Open Area - Land vs Projection Regions-1
- PURPOSE Measures % open area on ′land′ and ′projection′ regions via ′sandwich′ lighting technique
- DEFINE VARIABLES & OPEN FILES Open File C: ⁇ Data ⁇ 39291 ⁇ % Open Area ⁇ data.xls, channel #1
- the QUIPS algorithm is executed using the QWIN Pro software platform.
- the analyst is initially prompted to enter the material set information which is sent to the EXCEL file.
- the analyst is next prompted by a live image set up window on the computer monitor screen to place a material onto the auto-stage 308 .
- the material should be laid flat and gentle force applied at its edges to remove any macro-wrinkles that may be present. It should also be aligned so that the machine direction runs horizontally in the image.
- the Circline fluorescent lamp 314 can be on to assist in positioning the material.
- the analyst is prompted to adjust the incident Circline fluorescent lamp 314 via the Variable Auto-transformer to a white level reading of approximately 0.9.
- the sub-stage transmitted light bank 316 should either be turned off at this time or masked using a piece of light-blocking, black construction paper placed over the 3 inch by 3 inch opening 322 .
- the threshold is set using the white mode at a point approximately near the middle of the 8-bit gray-level range (e.g. 127). If necessary, the threshold level can be adjusted up or down so that the resulting detected binary will optimally encompass the projections shown in the acquired image with respect to their boundaries with the surrounding land region.
- the analyst After the algorithm automatically performs several binary image processing steps on the detected binary of the projections, the analyst will be given an opportunity to re-check projection detection and correct any inaccuracies.
- the analyst can toggle both the ‘control’ and ‘b’ keys simultaneously to re-check projection detection against the underlying acquired gray-scale image. If necessary, the analyst can select from a set of binary editing tools (e.g. draw, reject, etc.) to make any minor adjustments. If care is taken to ensure proper illumination and detection in the previously described steps, little or no correction at this point should be necessary.
- a set of binary editing tools e.g. draw, reject, etc.
- the analyst is prompted to turn off the incident Circline fluorescent lamp 314 and either turn on the sub-stage transmitted light bank or remove the light blocking mask.
- the sub-stage transmitted light bank is adjusted by the Variable Auto-transformer to a white level reading of approximately 0.97. At this point, the image focus can be optimized for the land areas of the material.
- the algorithm after performing additional operations on the resulting separate binary images for projections, land areas and open area, will then automatically perform measurements and output the data into a designated EXCEL spreadsheet file.
- the following measurement parameter data will be located in the EXCEL file after measurements and data transfer has occurred:
- the algorithm will direct the auto-stage 308 to move to the next field-of-view and the process of turning on the incident, Circline fluorescent lamp 314 and blocking the transmitted sub-stage lighting bank 316 will begin again. This process will repeat four times so that there will be five sets of data from five separate field-of-view images per single material replicate.
- Multiple sampling replicates from a single material can be performed during a single execution of the QUIPS algorithm (Note: The Sample For—Next line in the algorithm needs to be adjusted to reflect the number of material replicate analyses to be performed per material).
- the height of the projections can be determined by using the image analysis measurement method described herein.
- the image analysis method determines a dimensional numeric height value for projections using specific image analysis measurements of both land areas and projections with underlying land regions in a sample and then calculating the projection height alone by difference between the two.
- the projection height method is performed using conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect cross-sectional regions of both land areas and projection structures and then measure a mean linear height value for each when viewed using a camera with incident lighting. The resulting measurement data are used to compare the projection height characteristics of different types of body-side intake layers.
- Cross-sectioning can be performed by anchoring a representative piece of the sample on at least one of its cross-machine running straight edges on a flat, smooth surface with a strip of tape such as 3 ⁇ 4 inch SCOTCH® MagicTM tape produced by 3M. Cross-sectioning is then performed by using a new, previously unused single edge carbon steel blue blade (PAL) and carefully cutting in a direction away from and orthogonal to the anchored edge and thru the centers of at least one projection and preferably more if projections are arranged in rows running in the machine direction.
- PAL single edge carbon steel blue blade
- any remaining rows of projections located behind the cross-sectioned face of projections should be cut away and removed prior to mounting so that only cross-sectioned projections of interest are present.
- Such blades for cross-sectioning can be acquired from Electron Microscopy Sciences of Hatfield, Pa. (Cat. #71974). Cross-sectioning is performed in the machine-direction of the sample, and a fresh, previously unused blade should be used for each new cross-sectional cut.
- the cross-sectioned face can now be mounted so that the projections are directed upward away from the base mount using an adherent such as two-side tape so that it can be viewed using a video camera possessing an optical lens.
- the mount itself and any background behind the sample that will be viewed by the camera must be darkened using non-reflective black tape and black construction paper 346 (shown in FIG. 25 ), respectively.
- non-reflective black tape and black construction paper 346 shown in FIG. 25 .
- enough cross-sections should be cut and mounted separately from which a total of six projection height values can be determined.
- FIG. 25 An exemplary setup for acquiring the images is representatively illustrated in FIG. 25 .
- a CCD video camera 330 e.g., a Leica DFC 310 FX video camera operated in gray scale mode is available from Leica Microsystems of Heerbrugg, Switzerland
- a standard support 332 such as a Polaroid MP-4 Land Camera standard support available from Polaroid Resource Center in Cambridge, Miss. or equivalent.
- the standard support 332 is attached to a macro-viewer 334 such as a KREONITE macro-viewer available from Dunning Photo Equipment, Inc., having an office in Bixby, Okla.
- An auto stage 336 is placed on the upper surface of the macro-viewer 334 .
- the auto stage 336 is used to move the position of a given sample for viewing by the camera 330 .
- a suitable auto stage 336 is a Model H112, available from Prior Scientific Inc., having an office in Rockland, Mass.
- the darkened sample mount 338 exposing the cross-sectioned sample face possessing land areas and projections is placed on the auto stage 336 under the optical axis of a 50 mm Nikon lens 340 with an f-stop setting of 2.8.
- the Nikon lens 340 is attached to the Leica DFC 310 FX camera 330 using a 30 mm extension tube 342 and a c-mount adaptor.
- the sample mount 338 is oriented so the sample cross-section faces flush toward the camera 330 and runs in the horizontal direction of the resulting image with the projections directed upward away from the base mount.
- the cross-sectional face is illuminated with incident, incandescent lighting 344 provided by two, 150 watt, GE Reflector Flood lamps.
- the two flood lamps are positioned so that they provide more illumination to the cross-sectional face than to the sample mount 338 beneath it in the image.
- the flood lamps 344 When viewed from overhead directly above the camera 330 and underlying sample cross-section mount 338 , the flood lamps 344 will be positioned at approximately 30 degrees and 150 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane running thru the camera 330 . From this view the camera support will be at the 90 degree position.
- the illumination level of the lamps is controlled with a Variable Auto-transformer, type 3PN1010, available from Staco Energy Products Co. having an office in Dayton, Ohio.
- the image analysis software platform used to perform measurements is a QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, having an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland.
- the system and images are also calibrated using the QWIN software and a standard ruler with metric markings at least as small as one millimeter.
- the calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Units of millimeters per pixel are used for the calibration.
- the method for determining projection heights of a given sample includes the step of performing several, dimensional measurements.
- an image analysis algorithm is used to acquire and process images as well as perform measurements using Quantimet User Interactive Programming System (QUIPS) language.
- QUIPS Quantimet User Interactive Programming System
- NAME Height - Projection vs Land Regions -1
- PURPOSE Measures height of projection and land regions DEFINE VARIABLES & OPEN FILES -
- the following line is set to designate where measurement data will be stored Open File (C: ⁇ Data ⁇ 39291 ⁇ Height ⁇ data.xls, channel #1)
- CALVALUE 0.0083 Calibrate (CALVALUE CALUNITS$ per pixel)
- REPLICATE 1 to FIELDS, step 1
- ACQFILE$ ′′C: ⁇ lmages ⁇ 39291 - for Height ⁇ Text. 2H_′′+STR$(REPLICATE)+′′s.jpg′′
- Detect (whiter than 104, from Image0 into Binary0 delineated )
- IMAGE PROCESSING Binary Amend Close from BinaryO to Bi nary 1, cycles 4, operator Disc, edge erode on) Binary Amend (Open from Binary 1 to Binary2, cycles 4, operator Disc, edge erode on) Binary Identify (FillHoles from Binary2 to Binary3)
- Binary Amend Close from Binary3 to Binary4, cycles 15, operator Disc, edge erode on)
- Binary Amend Open from Binary4 to Binary5, cycles 20, operator Disc, edge erode on
- PauseText (′′Fill in projection & land regions that should be included, and reject over detected regions.′′)
- Binary Edit [PAUSE] Draw from Binary5 to Binary6, nib Fill, width 2) PauseText (′′Select ′Land′ region
- the QUIPS algorithm is executed using the QWIN Pro software platform.
- the analyst is initially prompted to enter sample identification information which is sent to a designated EXCEL file to which the measurement data will also be subsequently sent.
- the analyst is then prompted to position the mounted sample cross-section on the auto-stage 336 possessing the darkened background so the cross-sectional face is flush to the camera 330 with projections directed upward and the length running horizontally in the live image displayed on the video monitor screen.
- the analyst next adjusts the video camera 330 and lens' 340 vertical position to optimize the focus of the cross-sectional face.
- the illumination level is also adjusted by the analyst via the Variable Auto-transformer to a white level reading of approximately 0.95.
- an image will be acquired, detected and processed automatically by the QUIPS algorithm.
- the analyst will then be prompted to fill-in the detected binary image, using the computer mouse, of any projection and/or land areas shown in the cross-sectional image that should have been included by the previous detection and image processing steps as well as rejecting any over detected regions that go beyond the boundaries of the cross-sectional structure shown in the underlying gray-scale image.
- the analyst can toggle the ‘control’ and ‘B’ keys on the keyboard simultaneously to turn the overlying binary image on and off to assess how closely the binary matches with the boundaries of the sample shown in the cross-section. If the initial cross-sectioning sample preparation was performed well, little if any manual editing should be required.
- the analyst is now prompted to “Select ‘Land’ region for measurement” using the computer mouse. This selection is performed by carefully drawing a vertical line down through one side of a single land area located between or adjacent to projections and then, with the left mouse button still depressed, moving the cursor beneath the land area to its opposite side and then drawing another vertical line upward. Once this has occurred, the left mouse button can be released and the land area to be measured should be filled in with a green coloring. If the vertical edges of the resulting selected region are skewed in any way, the analyst can reset to the original detected binary by clicking on the ‘Undo’ button located within the Binary Edit window and begin the selection process again until straight vertical edges on both sides of the selected land region are obtained.
- the algorithm will then automatically perform measurements on both selected regions and output the data, in histogram format, into the designated EXCEL spreadsheet file.
- the histograms for land and projection regions will be labeled “Land Height (mm)” and “Projection+Land Height (mm),” respectively.
- a separate set of histograms will be generated for each selection of land and projection region pairs.
- the analyst will then again be prompted to position the sample and begin the process of selecting different land and projection regions.
- the analyst can either use the auto-stage joystick to move the same cross-section to a new sub-sampling position or an entirely different mounted cross-section obtained from the same sample can be positioned on the auto-stage 306 for measurement.
- the process for positioning the sample and selecting land and projection regions for measurement will occur six times for each execution of the QUIPS algorithm.
- a single projection height value is then determined by calculating the numerical difference between the mean values of the separate land and projection region histograms for each single pair of measurements.
- the QUIPS algorithm will provide six replicate measurement sets of both land and projection regions for a single sample so that six projection height values will be generated per sample.
- any ranges of values set forth in this disclosure contemplate all values within the range and are to be construed as support for claims reciting any sub-ranges having endpoints which are whole number values within the specified range in question.
- a disclosure of a range of from 1 to 5 shall be considered to support claims to any of the following ranges 1 to 5; 1 to 4; 1 to 3; 1 to 2; 2 to 5; 2 to 4; 2 to 3; 3 to 5; 3 to 4; and 4 to 5.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Vascular Medicine (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Absorbent Articles And Supports Therefor (AREA)
- Orthopedics, Nursing, And Contraception (AREA)
Abstract
An absorbent article can have a topsheet layer, a liquid impermeable layer, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer. The absorbent article can further include an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer can be positioned on a body facing surface of the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer can be positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core. The exudate management layer has a first component which defines an opening for direct passage of body exudates into the absorbent core. The exudate management layer has a second component which at least partially overlaps the first component of the exudate management layer and further extends in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article in a direction towards the posterior region of the absorbent article.
Description
- A primary function of a personal care absorbent article is to absorb and retain body exudates such as urine and fecal material with additional desired attributes including low leakage of the exudates from the absorbent article and a dry feel to the wearer of the absorbent article. Currently, a wide variety of products for absorbent of body exudates are available in the form of diapers, training pants, and incontinence devices. These products generally have an absorbent core positioned between a body-facing liquid permeable topsheet layer and a garment-facing liquid impermeable layer. The edges of the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer are often bonded together at their periphery to form a seal to contain the absorbent core and body exudates received into the product through the topsheet layer. In use, such products may have a front waist and rear waist region which can encircle the lower torso of the wearer to remain in place on the body of the wearer.
- Absorbent articles commonly fail, however, to prevent leakage of body exudates. Some body exudates, such as solid and semi-solid fecal material, have difficulty penetrating the topsheet layer of the absorbent article as easily as urine and tend to spread across the surface of the topsheet layer under the influence of gravity, motion, and pressure by the wearer of the absorbent article. The migration of such body exudates is often towards the perimeter of the absorbent article, increasing the likelihood of leakage and smears against the skin of the wearer which can make clean-up of the skin difficult.
- An additional problem is that such conventional absorbent article products may not always have an adequate fit to the body of the wearer which can lead to increased levels of leakage of body exudates from the product and discomfort during wear of the product. Many conventional absorbent article products are flat or have flat regions prior to use while the wearer's body is contoured. Even though the flat absorbent article product can bend during use, it can still fail to fully conform to the body of the wearer which can result in gaps between the product and the skin of the wearer resulting in leakage of body exudates, particularly those body exudates, such as solid and semi-solid femal material, which have a more difficult time penetrating the topsheet layer of the product. The movement of the wearer can also cause undesirable deformation of the product and fold lines within the product which can create pathways along which the body exudates can travel and leak from the product.
- There remains a need for an absorbent article that can adequately reduce the incidence of leakage of body exudates from the absorbent article. There remains a need for an absorbent article which can provide improved handling of body exudates. There remains a need for an absorbent article that can minimize the amount of body exudates in contact with the wearer's skin.
- In various embodiment, an absorbent article can have a longitudinal direction and a transverse direction; a longitudinal centerline and a transverse centerline; an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region positioned between the anterior region and the posterior region; an anterior region transverse direction end edge, a posterior region transverse direction end edge, and a pair of longitudinal direction side edges extending between and connecting the anterior region transverse direction end edge and the posterior region transverse direction end edge; a topsheet layer defining a body facing surface of the absorbent article, a liquid impermeable layer defining a garment facing surface of the absorbent article, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer; and an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer; the exudate management layer comprising a first component at least partially defining an opening in the exudate management layer; and a second component connected to the first component via a primary fold, the second component extending from the primary fold in the longitudinal direction towards the posterior region of the absorbent article, wherein the opening is positioned between the transverse centerline and the posterior region transverse direction end edge.
- In various embodiments, the exudate management layer is positioned on the body facing surface of the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer is positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core.
- In various embodiments, the absorbent article further has an acquisition layer.
- In various embodiments, the second component comprises a secondary fold.
- In various embodiments, the absorbent article further has a third component connected to the primary component of the exudate management layer via a third component primary fold. In various embodiments, the third component extends from the third component primary fold in the longitudinal direction towards the anterior region of the absorbent article.
- In various embodiments, the second component at least partially overlaps the first component. In various embodiments, the second component at least partially underlaps the first component.
- In various embodiments, the absorbent article further has an opposing pair of containment flaps extending in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article.
- In various embodiments, the topsheet layer is a fluid entangled laminate web comprising a support layer comprising a plurality of fibers and opposed first and second surfaces; a projection layer comprising a plurality of fibers and opposed inner and outer surfaces, the second surface of the support layer in contact with the inner surface of the projection layer, fibers of at least one of the support layer and the projection layer being fluid-entangled fibers of the other of the support layer and the projection layer; a plurality of hollow projections formed form a first plurality of the plurality of fibers in the projection layer, the plurality of hollow projections extending from the outer surface of the projection layer in a direction away from the support layer; and a land area, wherein the plurality of hollow projections are surrounded by the land area.
- In various embodiments, the absorbent core has a body facing surface and projections extending away from the body facing surface of the absorbent core.
- In various embodiments, the second component comprises at least one opening.
-
FIG. 1 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article. -
FIG. 2 is a top down view of the absorbent article ofFIG. 1 with portions cut away for clarity. -
FIG. 3 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article. -
FIG. 4A is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article ofFIG. 3 taken alongline 4A-4A. -
FIG. 4B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article ofFIG. 3 taken alongline 4B-4B. -
FIG. 5 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article. -
FIG. 6A is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article ofFIG. 5 taken alongline 6A-6A. -
FIG. 6B is an exploded cross-sectional view of the absorbent article ofFIG. 5 taken alongline 6B-6B. -
FIG. 7 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article. -
FIG. 8A is an exploded cross-sectional view of an exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article ofFIG. 7 taken alongline 8A-8A. -
FIG. 8B is an exploded cross-sectional view of an exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article ofFIG. 7 taken alongline 8B-8B. -
FIG. 9A is an exploded cross-sectional view of another exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article ofFIG. 7 taken alongline 9A-9A. -
FIG. 9B is an exploded cross-sectional view of another exemplary embodiment of the absorbent article ofFIG. 7 taken alongline 9B-9B. -
FIG. 10 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of a topsheet layer. -
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the topsheet layer ofFIG. 10 taken along line 11-11. -
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the topsheet layer ofFIG. 10 taken along line 11-11 showing possible directions of fiber movements within the topsheet layer due to a fluid entanglement process. -
FIG. 13 is a photomicrograph of a cross-sectional view of a portion of a foam and fiber composite. -
FIG. 14 is a photomicrograph of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite ofFIG. 13 such that the fibrous material is visible to the viewer. -
FIG. 15 is a photomicrograph of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite ofFIG. 13 such that the second planar surface of the foam material and portions of fibers are visible to the viewer. -
FIGS. 16A-16D are cross-sectional side views taken in the longitudinal direction of exemplary embodiments of exudate management layers. -
FIG. 17 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer in fluid communication with an absorbent core. -
FIG. 18 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer in fluid communication with an absorbent core. -
FIG. 19 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer. -
FIG. 20 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer. -
FIG. 21 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer. -
FIG. 22 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an exudate management layer. -
FIG. 23 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an absorbent article. -
FIG. 24 is a perspective view of an exemplary illustration of a set-up of an imaging system used for determining the percent open area of a fluid entangled laminate web. -
FIG. 25 is a perspective view of an exemplary illustration of a set-up of an imaging system for determining projection height of a fluid entangled laminate web. - Repeat use of reference characters in the present specification and drawings is intended to represent the same or analogous features or elements of the disclosure.
- The present disclosure is directed towards an absorbent article which can have an improved conformity to the body of the wearer of the absorbent article providing for an improved intake and retention of body exudates such as fecal material. An absorbent article can have a longitudinal direction, a transverse direction, and a depth direction. The absorbent article can have an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region. The absorbent article can have a topsheet layer, a liquid impermeable layer, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer. The absorbent article can further include an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer can be positioned on a body facing surface of the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer can be positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core. The exudate management layer has a first component which at least partially defines an opening for direct passage of body exudates into the absorbent core. The exudate management layer has a second component connected to the first component. The first component can provide the exudate management layer with a first height dimension and the second component can provide the exudate management layer with a second height dimension that is greater than the first height dimension.
- As used herein, the term “absorbent article” refers herein to an article which may be placed against or in proximity to the body (i.e., contiguous with the body) of the wearer to absorb and contain various liquid, solid, and semi-solid exudates discharged from the body. Such absorbent articles, as described herein, are intended to be discarded after a limited period of use instead of being laundered or otherwise restored for reuse. It is to be understood that the present disclosure is applicable to various disposable absorbent articles, including, but not limited to, diapers, training pants, youth pants, swim pants, and incontinence products, and the like without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
- As used herein, the term “airlaid” refers herein to a web manufactured by an airlaying process In the airlaying process, bundles of small fibers having typical lengths ranging from about 3 to about 52 mm are separated and entrained in an air supply and then deposited onto a forming screen, usually with the assistance of a vacuum supply. The randomly deposited fibers are then bonded to one another using, for example, hot air to activate a binder component or a latex adhesive. Airlaying is taught in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 4,640,810 to Laursen, et al., which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference thereto for all purposes.
- As used herein, the term “bonded” refers to the joining, adhering, connecting, attaching, or the like, of two elements. Two elements will be considered bonded together when they are joined, adhered, connected, attached, or the like, directly to one another or indirectly to one another, such as when bonded to an intermediate element. The bonding can occur via, for example, adhesive, pressure bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, stitching, suturing, and/or welding.
- As used herein, the term “bonded carded web” refers herein to webs that are made from staple fibers which are sent through a combing or carding unit which separates or breaks apart and aligns the staple fibers in the machine direction to form a generally machine direction oriented fibrous nonwoven web. This material may be bonded together by methods that can include point bonding, through air bonding, ultrasonic bonding, adhesive bonding, etc.
- As used herein, the term “coform” refers herein to composite materials comprising a mixture or stabilized matrix of thermoplastic fibers and a second non-thermoplastic material. As an example, coform materials may be made by a process in which at least one meltblown die head is arranged near a chute through which other materials are added to the web while it is forming. Such other materials may include, but are not limited to, fibrous organic materials such as woody or non-woody pulp such as cotton, rayon, recycled paper, pulp fluff, and also superabsorbent particles, inorganic and/or organic absorbent materials, treated polymeric staple fibers and so forth. Some examples of such coform materials are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,100,324 to Anderson, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,818,464 to Lau, U.S. Pat. No. 5,284,703 to Everhart, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,350,624 to Georger, et al., each of which are incorporated herein in their entirety by reference thereto for all purposes.
- As used herein, the term “conjugate fibers” refers herein to fibers which have been formed from at least two polymer sources extruded from separate extruders and spun together to form on fiber. Conjugate fibers are also sometimes referred to as bicomponent or multicomponent fibers. The polymers are arranged in substantially constantly positioned distinct zones across the cross-sections of the conjugate fibers and extend continuously along the length of the conjugate fibers. The configuration of such a conjugate fiber may be, for example, a sheath/core arrangement where one polymer is surrounded by another, or may be a side-by-side arrangement, a pie arrangement, or an “islands-in-the-sea” arrangement. Conjugate fibers are taught by U.S. Pat. No. 5,108,820 to Kaneko, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,795,668 to Krueger, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,540,992 to Marcher, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,336,552 to Strack, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,425,987 to Shawver, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,382,400 to Pike, et al., each being incorporated herein in their entirety by reference thereto for all purposes. For two component fibers, the polymers may be present in ratios of 75/25, 50/50, 25/75 or any other desired ratio. Additionally, polymer additives such as processing aids may be included in each zone.
- As used herein, the term “machine direction” (MD) refers to the length of a fabric in the direction in which it is produced, as opposed to a “cross-machine direction” (CD) which refers to the width of a fabric in a direction generally perpendicular to the machine direction.
- As used herein, the term “meltblown web” refers herein to a nonwoven web that is formed by a process in which a molten thermoplastic material is extruded through a plurality of fine, usually circular, die capillaries as molten fibers into converging high velocity gas (e.g., air) streams that attenuate the fibers of molten thermoplastic material to reduce their diameter, which may be to microfiber diameter. Thereafter, the meltblown fibers are carried by the high velocity gas stream and are deposited on a collecting surface to form a web of randomly disbursed meltblown fibers. Such a process is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 3,849,241 to Buten, et al., which is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference thereto for all purposes. Generally speaking, meltblown fibers may be microfibers that are substantially continuous or discontinuous, generally smaller than 10 microns in diameter, and generally tacky when deposited onto a collecting surface.
- As used herein, the term “nonwoven fabric” or “nonwoven web” refers herein to a web having a structure of individual fibers or threads which are interlaid, but not in an identifiable manner as in a knitted fabric. Nonwoven fabrics or webs have been formed from many processes such as, for example, meltblowing processes, spunbonding processes, through-air bonded carded web (also known as BCW and TABCW) processes, etc. The basis weight of nonwoven webs may generally vary, such as, from about 5, 10, or 20 gsm to about 120, 125, or 150 gsm.
- As used herein, the term “spunbond web” refers herein to a web containing small diameter substantially continuous fibers. The fibers are formed by extruding a molten thermoplastic material from a plurality of fine, usually circular, capillaries of a spinneret with the diameter of the extruded fibers then being rapidly reduced as by, for example, eductive drawing and/or other well-known spunbonding mechanisms. The production of spunbond webs is described and illustrated, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,340,563 to Appel, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,692,618 to Dorschner, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,802,817 to Matsuki, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,338,992 to Kinney, U.S. Pat. No. 3,341,394 to Kinney, U.S. Pat. No. 3,502,763 to Hartman, U.S. Pat. No. 3,502,538 to Levy, U.S. Pat. No. 3,542,615 to Dobo, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,382,400 to Pike, et al., which are each incorporated herein in their entirety by reference thereto for all purposes. Spunbond fibers are generally not tacky when they are deposited onto a collecting surface. Spunbond fibers may sometimes have diameters less than about 40 microns, and often between about 5 to about 20 microns.
- As used herein, the terms “superabsorbent polymer,” “superabsorbent,” or “SAP” shall be used interchangeably and shall refer to polymers that can absorb and retain extremely large amounts of a liquid relative to their own mass. Water absorbing polymers, which are classified as hydrogels, which can be cross-linked, absorb aqueous solutions through hydrogen bonding and other polar forces with water molecules. A SAP's ability to absorb water is based in par on iconicity (a factor of the ionic concentration of the aqueous solution), and the SAP functional polar groups that have an affinity for water. SAP are typically made from the polymerization of acrylic acid blended with sodium hydroxide I the presence of an initiator to form a poly-acrylic acid sodium salt (sometimes referred to as sodium polyacrylate). Other materials are also used to make a superabsorbent polymer, such as polyacrylamide copolymer, ethylene maleic anhydride copolymer, cross-linked carboxymethylcellulose, polyvinyl alcohol copolymers, cross-linked polyethylene oxide, and starch grafted copolymer of polyacrylonitrile. SAP may be present in absorbent articles in particle or fibrous form or as a coating or another material or fiber.
- Absorbent Article:
- The present disclosure is directed towards an absorbent article which can have an improved conformity to the body of the wearer of the absorbent article providing for an improved intake and retention of body exudates such as fecal material. An absorbent article can have a longitudinal direction, a transverse direction, and a depth direction. The absorbent article can have an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region. The absorbent article can have a topsheet layer, a liquid impermeable layer, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer. The absorbent article can further include an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer can be positioned on a body facing surface of the topsheet layer. In various embodiments, the exudate management layer can be positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core. The exudate management layer has a first component which at least partially defines an opening for direct passage of body exudates into the absorbent core. The exudate management layer has a second component connected to the first component. The first component can provide the exudate management layer with a first height dimension and the second component can provide the exudate management layer with a second height dimension that is greater than the first height dimension.
- Referring to
FIGS. 1, 2, 3, 4A, 4B, 5, 6A, 6B, 7, 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B , anabsorbent article 10 of the present disclosure is exemplified in the form of a diaper. It is to be understood that the present disclosure is suitable for use with various other absorbent articles which are designed to be worn about the lower torso of a wearer, such as, but not limited to, training pants or adult incontinence pants, without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.FIG. 1 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of theabsorbent article 10 andFIG. 2 is a top down view of an exemplary embodiment of anabsorbent article 10 with portions cut away for clarity.FIGS. 3, 4A, 4B, 5, 6A, 6B, 7, 8A, 8B, 9A , and 9B provide further illustrations of exemplary embodiments of anabsorbent article 10 with anexudate management layer 40. - The
absorbent article 10 can have a longitudinal direction (X), a transverse direction (Y), and a depth direction (Z). Theabsorbent article 10 can have ananterior region 12, aposterior region 14, and acentral region 16 located between theanterior region 12 and theposterior region 14. Theabsorbent article 10 can have a first transverse direction endedge 20, a second transverse direction endedge 22 opposed to the first transverse direction endedge 20, and a pair of opposing longitudinal direction side edges 24 extending between and connecting the first and second transverse direction end edges, 20 and 22. Theabsorbent article 10 can have a wearer facing, liquidpermeable topsheet layer 30 and a garment facing, liquidimpermeable layer 36. Anabsorbent core 38 can be positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and the liquidimpermeable layer 36. Theabsorbent article 10 can have anexudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with thetopsheet layer 30. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned on abody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30 such as, for example, illustrated in the exemplary embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 3, 4A, 4B, 5, 6A, and 6B . In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and theabsorbent core 38 such as, for example, illustrated in the exemplary embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 7, 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B . Thetopsheet layer 30 and the liquidimpermeable layer 36 can both extend beyond the outermost peripheral edges of theabsorbent core 38 and can be peripherally bonded together, either entirely or partially, using known bonding techniques to form a sealed peripheral region. For example, thetopsheet layer 30 and the liquidimpermeable layer 36 can be bonded together by adhesive bonding, ultrasonic bonding, or any other suitable bonding technique known in the art. - In various embodiments in which the
absorbent article 10 is a diaper, training pant, youth pant, swim pant, or an incontinence product such as an adult incontinence pant, theabsorbent article 10 can be worn about the lower torso of the wearer and can have awaist opening 230 andleg openings 232. Theabsorbent article 10 can have leg elastic members, 240 and 242, which can be bonded to the liquidimpermeable layer 36 such as by, for example, an adhesive, generally adjacent the lateral outer edges of the liquidimpermeable layer 36. Alternatively, the leg elastic members, 240 and 242, may be disposed between other layers of theabsorbent article 10. A wide variety of elastic materials may be used for the leg elastic members, 240 and 242. Suitable elastic materials can include sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric materials. The elastic materials can be stretched and secured to a substrate, secured to a gathered substrate, or secured to a substrate and then elasticized or shrunk, for example, with the application of heat, such that the elastic retractive forces are imparted to the substrate. - In various embodiments, the
absorbent article 10 can have waist elastic members, 244 and 246, which can be formed of any suitable elastic material. In such an embodiment, suitable elastic materials can include, but are not limited to, sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric polymers. The elastic materials can be stretched and bonded to a substrate, bonded to a gathered substrate, or bonded to a substrate and then elasticized or shrunk, for example, with the application of heat, such that elastic retractive forces are imparted to the substrate. It is to be understood, however, that the waist elastic members, 244 and 246, may be omitted from theabsorbent article 10 without departing from the scope of this disclosure. - In various embodiments, the
absorbent article 10 can include a fastener system. The fastener system can include one or moreback fasteners 250 and one or morefront fasteners 252. Portions of the fastener system may be included in theanterior region 12,posterior region 14, or both. The fastener system can be configured to secure theabsorbent article 10 about the waist of the wearer and maintain theabsorbent article 10 in place during use. In an embodiment, theback fasteners 250 can include one or more materials bonded together to form a composite ear as is known in the art. For example, the composite fastener may be composed of astretch component 254, a nonwoven carrier orhook base 256, and afastening component 258. - Topsheet Layer:
- The
topsheet layer 30 defines abody facing surface 32 of theabsorbent article 10 that may directly contact the body of the wearer and is liquid permeable to receive body exudates. Thetopsheet layer 30 is desirably provided for comfort and functions to direct body exudates away from the body of the wearer, through its own structure, and towards theabsorbent core 38. Thetopsheet layer 30 desirably retains little to no liquid in its structure, so that it provides a relatively comfortable and non-irritating surface next to the skin of the wearer of theabsorbent article 10. - The
topsheet layer 30 can be a single layer of material, or alternatively, can be multiple layers that have been laminated together. Thetopsheet layer 30 can be constructed of any material such as one or more woven sheets, one or more fibrous nonwoven sheets, one or more film sheets, such as blown or extruded films, which may themselves be of single or multiple layers, one or more foam sheets, such as reticulated, open cell or closed cell foams, a coated nonwoven sheet, or a combination of any of these materials. Such combination can be adhesively, thermally, or ultrasonically laminated into a unified planar sheet structure to form atopsheet layer 30. - In various embodiments the
topsheet layer 30 can be constructed from various nonwoven webs such as meltblown webs, spunbond webs, hydroentangled spunlace webs, or through air bonded carded webs. Examples ofsuitable topsheet layer 30 materials can include, but are not limited to, natural fiber webs (such as cotton), rayon, hydroentangled webs, bonded carded webs of polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene, nylon, or other heat-bondable fibers (such as bicomponent fibers), polyolefins, copolymers of polypropylene and polyethylene, linear low-density polyethylene, and aliphatic esters such as polylactic acid. Finely perforated films and net materials can also be used, as can laminates of/or combinations of these materials. An example of asuitable topsheet layer 30 can be a bonded carded web made of polypropylene and polyethylene such as that obtainable from Sandler Corp., Germany. U.S. Pat. No. 4,801,494 to Datta, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 4,908,026 to Sukiennik, et al., and WO 2009/062998 to Texol teach various other topsheet materials that may be used as thetopsheet layer 30, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety.Additional topsheet layer 30 materials can include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,397,644 to Matthews, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,629,643 to Curro, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,188,625 to Van Iten, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,382,400 to Pike, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,533,991 to Kirby, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,410,823 to Daley, et al., and U.S. Publication No. 2012/0289917 to Abuto, et al., each of which is hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety. - In various embodiments, the
topsheet layer 30 may contain a plurality of apertures formed therethrough to permit body exudates to pass more readily into theabsorbent core 38. The apertures may be randomly or uniformly arranged throughout thetopsheet layer 30. The size, shape, diameter, and number of apertures may be varied to suit an absorbent article's 10 particular needs. - In various embodiments, the
tospheet layer 30 can have a basis weight ranging from about 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 gsm to about 50, 100, 120, 125, or 150 gsm. For example, in an embodiment, atopsheet layer 30 can be constructed from a through air bonded carded web having a basis weight ranging from about 15 gsm to about 100 gsm. In another example, atopsheet layer 30 can be constructed from a through air bonded carded web having a basis weight from about 20 gsm to about 50 gsm, such as a through air bonded carded web that is readily available from nonwoven material manufacturers, such as Xiamen Yanjan Industry, Beijing, DaYuan Nonwoven Fabrics, and others. - In various embodiments, the
topsheet layer 30 can be at least partially hydrophilic. In various embodiments, a portion of thetopsheet layer 30 can be hydrophilic and a portion of thetopsheet layer 30 can be hydrophobic. In various embodiments, the portions of thetopsheet layer 30 which can be hydrophobic can be either an inherently hydrophobic material or can be a material treated with a hydrophobic coating. - In various embodiments, the
topsheet layer 30 can be amulticomponent topsheet layer 30 such as by having two or more different nonwoven or film materials, with the different materials placed in separate locations in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. For example, thetopsheet layer 30 can be a two layer or multicomponent material having a central portion positioned along and straddling alongitudinal centerline 18 of anabsorbent article 10, with lateral side portions flanking and bonded to each side edge of the central portion. The central portion can be constructed from a first material and the side portions can be constructed from a material which can be the same as or different from the material of the central portion. In such embodiments, the central portion may be at least partially hydrophilic and the side portions may be inherently hydrophobic or may be treated with a hydrophobic coating. Examples of constructions of multi-component topsheet layers 30 are generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,961,505 to Coe, U.S. Pat. No. 5,415,640 to Kirby, and U.S. Pat. No. 6,117,523 to Sugahara, each of which is incorporated herein by reference thereto in its entirety. - In various embodiments, a central portion of a
topsheet layer 30 can be positioned symmetrically about theabsorbent article 10longitudinal centerline 18. Such central longitudinally directed central portion can be a through air bonded carded web (“TABCW”) having a basis weight between about 15 and about 100 gsm. Previously described nonwoven, woven, and aperture film topsheet layer materials may also be used as the central portion of atopsheet layer 30. In various embodiments, the central portion can be constructed from a TABCW material having a basis weight from about 20 gsm to about 50 gsm such as is available from Xiamen Yanjan Industry, Beijing, DaYuan Nonwoven Fabrics, and others. Alternatively, aperture films, such as those available from such film suppliers as Texol, Italy and Tredegar, U.S.A. may be utilized. Different nonwoven, woven, or film sheet materials may be utilized as the side portions of thetopsheet layer 30. The selection ofsuch topsheet layer 30 materials can vary based upon the overall desired attributes of thetopsheet layer 30. For example, it may be desired to have a hydrophilic material in the central portion and hydrophobic-barrier type materials in the side portions to prevent leakage and increase a sense of dryness in the area of the side portions. Such side portions can be adhesively, thermally, ultrasonically, or otherwise bonded to the central portion along or adjacent the longitudinally directed side edges of the central portion. Traditional absorbent article construction adhesive may be used to bond the side portions to the central portion. Either of the central portion and/or the side portions may be treated with surfactants and/or skin-health benefit agents, as are well known in the art. - Such longitudinally directed side portions can be of a single or multi-layered construction. In various embodiments, the side portions can be adhesively or otherwise bonded laminates. In various embodiments, the side portions can be constructed of an upper fibrous nonwoven layer, such as a spunbond material, laminated to a bottom layer of a hydrophobic barrier film material. Such a spunbond layer may be formed from a polyolefin, such as a polypropylene and can include a wetting agent if desired. In various embodiments, a spunbond layer can have a basis weight from about 10 or 12 gsm to about 30 or 70 gsm and can be treated with hydrophilic wetting agents. In various embodiments, a film layer may have apertures to allow fluid to permeate to lower layers, and may be either of a single layer or multi-layer construction. In various embodiments, such film can be a polyolefin, such as polyethylene having a basis weight from about 10 to about 40 gsm. Construction adhesive can be utilized to laminate the spunbond layer to the film layer at an add-on level of between about 0.1 gsm and 15 gsm. When a film barrier layer is used in the
overall topsheet layer 30 design, it may include opacifying agents, such as film pigments, that can help the film in masking stains along theabsorbent article 10 side edges, thereby serving as a masking element. In such a fashion, the film layer can serve to limit visualization of a fluid insult stain along theabsorbent article 10 side edges when viewed from above thetopsheet layer 30. The film layer may also serve as a barrier layer to prevent rewet of thetopsheet layer 30 as well as to prevent the flow of fluid off the side edges of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, the side portions can be laminates such as a spunbond-meltblown-meltblown-spunbond layer (“SMMS”) laminate, spunbond-film laminate, or alternatively, other nonwoven laminate combinations. - In various embodiments, the
topsheet layer 30 can be a fluidentangled laminate web 160 withprojections 162 extending outwardly and away from at least one intended body-facing surface of thelaminate web 160 such as illustrated inFIGS. 10-12 . In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be hollow. Thelaminate web 160 can have two layers such as asupport layer 164 and aprojection layer 166. Thesupport layer 164 can have afirst surface 168 and an opposedsecond surface 170 as well as athickness 172. Theprojection layer 166 can have aninner surface 174 and an opposedouter surface 176 as well as athickness 178. Aninterface 180 can be present between thesupport layer 164 and theprojection layer 166. In various embodiments, fibers of theprojection layer 166 can cross theinterface 180 and be entangled with and engage thesupport layer 164 so as to form thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments in which thesupport layer 164 is a fibrous nonwoven web, the fibers of thesupport layer 164 may cross theinterface 180 and be entangled with the fibers of theprojection layer 166. - In various embodiments, the
projections 162 can be filled with fibers from theprojection layer 166 and/or thesupport layer 164. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be hollow. Theprojections 162 can have closed ends 182 which can be devoid of apertures. In various embodiments, however, it may be desirable to create one or more apertures in each of theprojections 162. Such apertures can be formed in the closed ends 182 and/orside walls 184 of theprojections 162. Such apertures are to be distinguished from interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing which is the spacing from one individual fiber to the next individual fiber. - In various embodiments, the
projections 162 can have a percentage of open area in which light can pass through theprojections 162 unhindered by the material forming theprojections 162, such as, for example, fibrous material. The percentage of open area present in theprojections 162 encompasses all area of theprojection 162 wherein light can pass through theprojection 162 unhindered. Thus, for example, the percentage of open area of aprojection 162 can encompass all open area of theprojection 162 via apertures, interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing, and any other spacing within theprojection 162 where light can pass through unhindered. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be formed without apertures and the open area can be due to the interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can have less than about 1, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160 as measured according to the Method to Determine Percent Open Area test method described herein. - In various embodiments, the shapes of the
projections 162, when viewed from above, may be, for example, round, oval, square, rectangular, triangular, diamond-shaped, etc. Both the width and the height of theprojections 162 can be varied as can be the spacing and pattern of theprojections 162. In an embodiment, theprojections 162 can have a height, measured according to the Method for Determining Height of Projections test method described herein, of greater than about 1 mm. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can have a height greater than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 mm. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can have a height from about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 mm to about 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 mm. - The
projections 162 of thelaminate web 160 can be located on and emanate from theouter surface 176 of theprojection layer 166. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can extend from theouter surface 176 of theprojection layer 166 in a direction away from thesupport layer 164. In various embodiments in which theprojections 162 can be hollow, they can haveopen ends 186 which can be located towards theinner surface 174 of theprojection layer 166 and can be covered by thesecond surface 170 of thesupport layer 164 or theinner surface 174 of theprojection layer 166 depending upon the amount of fiber that has been used from theprojection layer 166 to form theprojections 162. Theprojections 162 can be surrounded byland areas 188 which can be formed from theouter surface 176 of theprojection layer 166 though the thickness of theland areas 188 can be comprised of both theprojection layer 166 and thesupport layer 164. Theland areas 188 can be relatively flat and planar or topographical variability may be built into theland areas 188. For example, in various embodiments, aland area 188 may have a plurality of three-dimensional shapes formed into it by forming theprojection layer 166 on a three-dimensionally-shaped forming surface such as is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,741,941 to Engelbert, et al. and incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes. For example, in various embodiments, aland area 188 may be provided withdepressions 190 which can extend all or part way into theprojection layer 166 and/orsupport layer 164. In addition, aland area 188 may be subjected to embossing which can impart surface texture and other functional attributes to theland area 188. In various embodiments, aland area 188 and thelaminate web 160 as a whole may be provided withapertures 192 which can extend through thelaminate web 160 so as to further facilitate the movement of body exudate into and through thelaminate web 160.Such apertures 192 are to be distinguished from interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing, which is the spacing from one individual fiber to the next individual fiber. - In various embodiments, the
land areas 188 can have a percentage of open area in which light can pass through theland areas 188 unhindered by the material forming theland areas 188, such as, for example, fibrous material. The percentage of open area present in theland areas 188 encompasses all area of theland areas 188 where light can pass through theland areas 188 unhindered. Thus, for example, the percentage of open area of aland area 188 can encompass all open area of theland areas 188 via apertures, interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing, and any other spacing within theland areas 188 when light can pass through unhindered. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can have greater than about 1% open area in a chosen area oflaminate web 160, as measured according to the Method to Determine Percent Open Area test method described herein. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can be formed without apertures and the open area can be due to the interstitial fiber-to-fiber spacing. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can have greater than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can have about 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5, 11, 11.5, 12, 12.5, 13, 13.5, 14, 14.5, 15, 15.5, 16, 16.5, 17, 17.5, 18, 18.5, 19, 19.5, or 20% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can have from about 1, 2, or 3% to about 4 or 5% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can have from about 5, 6, or 7% to about 8, 9, or 10% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can have from about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15% to about 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, the land areas can have greater than about 20% open area in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. - The
projections 162 of thelaminate web 160 can be provided in any orientation as deemed suitable. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 of thelaminate web 160 can be provided randomly to thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be oriented linearly in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be oriented linearly in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be oriented linearly in a direction which can be at an angle to the longitudinal direction (X) and/or the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. Theland areas 188 of thelaminate web 160 can be provided in any orientation as deemed suitable. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can be oriented linearly in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can be oriented linearly in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, theland areas 188 can be oriented linearly in a direction which can be at an angle to the longitudinal direction (X) and the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. - In various embodiments, the
projections 162 and/or theland areas 188 can be provided such that theprojections 162 are located in thecentral region 16 of theabsorbent article 10, are located towards the perimeter of theabsorbent article 10, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can have varying heights in different areas of theabsorbent article 10. In such embodiments, for example, theprojections 162 can have a first height in an area of theabsorbent article 10 and a different height in a different area of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, theprojections 162 can have varying diameters in different areas of theabsorbent article 10. In such embodiments, for example, theprojections 162 can have a first diameter in an area of theabsorbent article 10 and can have a different diameter in another area of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, the concentration ofprojections 162 can vary in theabsorbent article 10. In such embodiments, an area of theabsorbent article 10 can have a higher concentration ofprojections 162 than the concentration ofprojections 162 in a second area of theabsorbent article 10. - While it is possible to vary the density and fiber content of the
projections 162, in various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be “hollow.” When theprojections 162 are hollow, they can have ashell 194 formed from the fibers of theprojection layer 166. Theshell 194 can define aninterior space 196 which can have a lower density of fibers as compared to theshell 194 of theprojections 162. By “density” it is meant the fiber count or content per chosen unit of volume within a portion of theinterior space 196 or theshell 194 of theprojection 162. The density of theshell 194 may vary within a particular orindividual projection 162 and it also may vary as betweendifferent projections 162. In addition, the size of the hollowinterior space 196 as well as its density may vary within a particular orindividual projection 162 and it also may vary as betweendifferent projections 162. If there is at least some portion of aninterior space 196 of aprojection 162 that has a lower fiber density than at least some portion of theshell 194 of thesame projection 162, then theprojection 162 is regarded as being “hollow”. In this regard, in some situations, there may not be a well-defined demarcation between theshell 194 and theinterior space 196 of theprojection 162 but, if with sufficient magnification of a cross-section of one of theprojections 162, it can be seen that at least some portion of theinterior space 196 of theprojection 162 has a lower density than some portion of theshell 194 of thesame projection 162, then theprojection 162 is regarded as being “hollow”, If at least a portion of theprojections 162 of alaminate web 160 are hollow, theprojection layer 166 and thelaminate web 160 are regarded as being “hollow” or as having “hollow projections”. In various embodiments, the portion of theprojections 162 which are hollow can be greater than or equal to about 50 percent of theprojections 162 in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160. In various embodiments, greater than or equal to about 70 percent of theprojections 162 in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160 can be hollow. In various embodiments, greater than or equal to about 90 percent of theprojections 162 in a chosen area of thelaminate web 160 can be hollow. - The
laminate web 160 can be the result of the movement of the fibers in theprojection layer 166 in one and sometimes two or more directions. As previously noted, thelaminate web 160 can be a fluid entangled laminate web. Referring toFIG. 12 , if the forming surface upon which theprojection layer 166 is placed is solid except for the forming holes used to form theprojections 162, then the force of the fluid entangling streams hitting and rebounding off the solid surface land areas corresponding to theland areas 188 of theprojection layer 166 can cause a migration of fibers adjacent theinner surface 174 of theprojection layer 166 into thesupport layer 164 adjacent itssecond surface 170. This migration of fibers in the first direction can be represented by thearrows 198 shown inFIG. 12 . In order to form theprojections 162 extending outwardly from theouter surface 176 of theprojection layer 166, there must be a migration of fibers in a second direction as shown by thearrows 200. It is this migration in the second direction which causes fibers from theprojection layer 166 to move out and away from theouter surface 176 to form theprojections 162. In various embodiments in which thesupport layer 164 can be a fibrous nonwoven web, depending on the degree of web integrity and the strength and dwell time of the fluid jets during the entanglement process, there may also be movement ofsupport layer 164 fibers into theprojection layer 166 as shown byarrows 202 inFIG. 12 . The net result of these fiber movements can be the creation of alaminate web 160 with good overall integrity and lamination of the layers (164 and 166) at theirinterface 180 thereby allowing further processing and handling of thelaminate web 160. As a result of the fluid entanglement process to create thelaminate web 160, it is generally not desirable that the fluid pressure used to form theprojections 162 be of sufficient force so as to force fibers from thesupport layer 164 to be exposed on theouter surface 176 of theprojection layer 166. - The
support layer 164 can support theprojection layer 166 and can be made from a number of structures provided thesupport layer 164 can be capable of supporting theprojection layer 166. The primary functions of thesupport layer 164 can be to protect theprojection layer 166 during the formation of theprojections 162, to be able to bond to or be entangled with theprojection layer 166 and to aid in further processing of theprojection layer 166 and theresultant laminate web 160. Suitable materials for thesupport layer 164 can include, but are not limited to, nonwoven fabrics or webs, scrim materials, netting materials, paper/cellulose/wood pulp-based products which can be considered a subset of nonwoven fabrics or webs as well as foam materials, films and combinations of the foregoing provided the material or materials chosen are capable of withstanding a process of manufacture such as a fluid-entangling process. In an embodiment, thesupport layer 164 can be a fibrous nonwoven web made from a plurality of randomly deposited fibers which may be staple length fibers such as are used, for example, in carded webs, air laid webs, etc. or they may be more continuous fibers such as are found in, for example, meltblown or spunbond webs. Due to the functions thesupport layer 164 must perform, thesupport layer 164 can have a higher degree of integrity than theprojection layer 166. In this regard, thesupport layer 164 can remain substantially intact when it is subjected to a fluid-entangling process. The degree of integrity of thesupport layer 164 can be such that the material forming thesupport layer 164 can resist being driven down into and filling theprojections 162 of theprojection layer 166. As a result, in an embodiment in which thesupport layer 164 is a fibrous nonwoven web, it should have a higher degree of fiber-to-fiber bonding and/or fiber entanglement than the fibers in theprojection layer 166. While it can be desirable to have fibers from thesupport layer 164 entangle with the fibers of theprojection layer 166 adjacent theinterface 180 between the two layers, it is generally desired that the fibers of thissupport layer 164 not be integrated or entangled into theprojection layer 166 to such a degree that large portions of these fibers find their way inside theprojections 162. - In order to resist the higher degree of fiber movement, as mentioned above, in an embodiment, the
support layer 164 can have a higher degree of integrity than theprojection layer 166. This higher degree of integrity can be brought about in a number of ways. One can be fiber-to-fiber bonding which can be achieved through thermal or ultrasonic bonding of the fibers to one another with or without the use of pressure as in through-air bonding, point bonding, powder bonding, chemical bonding, adhesive bonding, embossing, calender bonding, etc. In addition, other materials may be added to the fibrous mix such as adhesives and/or bicomponent fibers. Pre-entanglement of a fibrousnonwoven support layer 164 may also be used such as, for example, by subjecting the web to hydroentangling, needlepunching, etc., prior to thissupport layer 164 being joined to aprojection layer 166. Combinations of the foregoing are also possible. Still other materials such as foams, scrims and nettings may have enough initial integrity so as to not need further processing. The level of integrity can in many cases be visually observed due to, for example, the observation with the unaided eye of such techniques as point bonding which is commonly used with fibrous nonwoven webs such as spunbond webs and staple fiber-containing webs. Further magnification of thesupport layer 164 may also reveal the use of fluid-entangling or the use of thermal and/or adhesive bonding to join the fibers together. Depending on whether samples of the individual layers (164 and 166) are available, tensile testing in either or both of the machine and cross-machine directions may be undertaken to compare the integrity of thesupport layer 164 to theprojection layer 166. See for example ASTM test D5035-11 which is incorporated herein its entirety for all purposes. - The type, basis weight, tensile strength and other properties of the
support layer 164 can be chosen and varied depending upon the particular end use of theresultant laminate web 160. When thelaminate web 160 is to be used as part of a personal care absorbent article, it can be generally desirable that thesupport layer 164 be a layer that is fluid pervious, has good wet and dry strength, is able to absorb fluids such as body exudates, possibly retain the fluids for a certain period of time and then release the fluids to one or more subjacent layers. In this regard, fibrous nonwovens such as spunbond webs, meltblown webs and carded webs such as airlaid webs, bonded carded webs and coform materials are well-suited as support layers 164. Foam materials and scrim materials are also well-suited. In addition, thesupport layer 164 may be a multi-layered material due to the use of several layers or the use of multi-bank formation processes as are commonly used in making spunbond webs and meltblown webs as well as layered combinations of meltblown and spunbond webs. In the formation of such support layers 164, both natural and synthetic materials may be used alone or in combination to fabricate the materials. In various embodiments, thesupport layer 164 can have a basis weight ranging from about 5 to about 40 or 50 gsm. - The type, basis weight and porosity of the
support layer 164 can affect the process conditions necessary to form theprojections 162 in theprojection layer 166. Heavier basis weight materials can increase the entangling force of the entangling fluid streams needed to form theprojections 162 in theprojection layer 166. However, heavier basis weight support layers 164 can also provide improved support for theprojection layer 166 as theprojection layer 166 by itself can be too stretchy to maintain the shape of theprojections 162 post the formation process. Theprojection layer 164 by itself can unduly elongate in the machine direction due to the mechanical forces exerted on it by subsequent winding and converting processes and consequently diminish and distort the projections. Also, without thesupport layer 164, theprojections 162 in theprojection layer 166 tend to collapse due to the winding pressures and compressive weights theprojection layer 166 experiences in the winding process and subsequent conversion and do not recover to the extent they do when asupport layer 164 is present. - The
support layer 164 may be subjected to further treatment and/or additives to alter or enhance its properties. For example, surfactants and other chemicals may be added both internally and externally to the components forming all or a portion of thesupport layer 164 to alter or enhance its properties. Compounds commonly referred to as hydrogels or superabsorbents which absorb many times their weight in liquids may be added to thesupport layer 164 in both particulate and fiber form. - The
projection layer 166 can be made from a plurality of randomly deposited fibers which may be staple length fibers such as are used, for example, in carded webs, airlaid webs, coform webs, etc., or they may be more continuous fibers such as are found in, for example, meltblown or spunbond webs. The fibers in theprojection layer 166 can have less fiber-to-fiber bonding and/or fiber entanglement and thus less integrity as compared to the integrity of thesupport layer 164, especially in embodiments when thesupport layer 164 is a fibrous nonwoven web. In an embodiment, the fibers in theprojection layer 166 may have no initial fiber-to-fiber bonding for purposes of allowing the formation of theprojections 162. Alternatively, when both thesupport layer 164 and theprojection layer 166 can both be fibrous nonwoven webs, theprojection layer 166 can have less integrity than thesupport layer 164 due to theprojection layer 166 having, for example, less fiber-to-fiber bonding, less adhesive or less pre-entanglement of the fibers forming theprojection layer 166. - The
projection layer 166 can have a sufficient amount of fiber movement capability to allow a fluid entangling process to be able to move a first plurality of the plurality of fibers of theprojection layer 166 out of the X-Y plane of theprojection layer 166 and into the perpendicular or Z-direction of theprojection layer 166 so as to be able to form theprojections 162. As noted herein, in various embodiments, theprojections 162 can be hollow. In an embodiment, a second plurality of the plurality of fibers in theprojection layer 166 can become entangled with thesupport layer 164. If more continuous fiber structures are being used such as meltblown or spunbond webs, in an embodiment, there may be little or no pre-bonding of theprojection layer 166 prior to the fluid entanglement process. Longer fibers such as are generated in meltblowing and spunbonding processes (which are often referred to as continuous fibers to differentiate them from staple length fibers) will typically require more force to displace the fibers in the Z-direction than will shorter, staple length fibers that typically have fiber lengths less than about 100 mm and more typically fibers lengths in the 10 to 60 mm range. Conversely, staple fiber webs such as carded webs and airlaid webs can have some degree of pre-bonding or entanglement of the fibers due to their shorter length. Such shorter fibers require less fluid force from the fluid entangling streams to move them in the Z-direction to form theprojections 162. As a result, a balance must be met between fiber length, degree of pre-fiber bonding, fluid force, web speed and dwell time so as to be able to create theprojections 162 without, unless desired, forming apertures in theland areas 188 or theprojections 162 or forcing too much material into theinterior space 196 of theprojections 162 thereby making theprojections 162 too rigid for some end-use applications. - In various embodiments, the
projection layer 166 can have a basis weight ranging from about 10 gsm to about 60 gsm. Spunbond webs can typically have basis weights of between about 15 and about 50 gsm when being used as theprojection layer 166. Fiber diameters can range between about 5 and about 20 microns. The fibers may be single component fibers formed from a single polymer composition or they may be bicomponent or multicomponent fibers wherein one portion of the fiber can have a lower melting point than the other components so as to allow fiber-to-fiber bonding through the use of heat and/or pressure. Hollow fibers may also be used. The fibers may be formed from any polymer formulations typically used to form spunbond webs. Examples of such polymers include, but are not limited to, polypropylene (“PP”), polyester (“PET”), polyamide (“PA”), polyethylene (“PE”) and polylactic acid (“PLA”). The spunbond webs may be subjected to post-formation bonding and entangling techniques if necessary to improve the processability of the web prior to its being subjected to the projection forming process. - Meltblown webs can typically have basis weights of between about 20 and about 50 gsm when being used as the
projection layer 166. Fiber diameters can range between about 0.5 and about 5 microns. The fibers may be single component fibers formed from a single polymer composition or they may be bicomponent or multicomponent fibers wherein one portion of the fiber can have a lower melting point than the other components so as to allow fiber-to-fiber bonding through the use of heat and/or pressure. The fibers may be formed from any polymer formulations typically used to form spunbond webs. Examples of such polymers include, but are not limited to, PP, PET, PA, PE and PLA. - Carded and airlaid webs can use staple fibers that can typically range in length between about 10 and about 100 millimeters. Fiber denier can range between about 0.5 and about 6 denier depending upon the particular end use. Basis weights can range between about 20 and about 60 gsm. The staple fibers may be made from a wide variety of polymers including, but not limited to, PP, PET, PA, PE, PLA, cotton, rayon, flax, wool, hemp and regenerated cellulose such as, for example, Viscose. Blends of fibers may be utilized too, such as blends of bicomponent fibers and single component fibers as well as blends of solid fibers and hollow fibers. If bonding is desired, it may be accomplished in a number of ways including, for example, through-air bonding, calender bonding, point bonding, chemical bonding and adhesive bonding such as powder bonding. If needed, to further enhance the integrity and processability of a
projection layer 166 prior to the projection forming process, theprojection layer 166 may be subjected to pre-entanglement processes to increase fiber entanglement within theprojection layer 166 prior to the formation of theprojections 162. Hydroentangling can be advantageous in this regard. - Examples of a
laminate web 160 and process for manufacturing alaminate web 160 can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 9,474,660 to Kirby et al. which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. - Absorbent Core:
- An
absorbent core 38 can be positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and the liquidimpermeable layer 36 of theabsorbent article 10. Theabsorbent core 38 can generally be any single layer structure or combination of layer components, which can demonstrate some level of compressibility, conformability, be non-irritating to the wearer's skin, and capable of absorbing and retaining liquids and other body exudates. In various embodiments, theabsorbent core 38 can be formed from a variety of different materials and can contain any number of desired layers. For example, theabsorbent core 38 can include one or more layers (e.g., two layers) of absorbent web material of cellulosic fibers (e.g., wood pulp fibers), other natural fibers, synthetic fibers, woven or nonwoven sheets, scrim netting, or other stabilizing structures, superabsorbent material, binder materials, surfactants, selected hydrophobic and hydrophilic materials, pigments, lotions, odor control agents or the like, as well as combinations thereof. In an embodiment, the absorbent web material can include a matrix of cellulosic fluff and can also include superabsorbent material. The cellulosic fluff can comprise a blend of wood pulp fluff. An example of wood pulp fluff can be identified with the trade designation NB416, available from Weyerhaeuser Corp., and is a bleached, highly absorbent wood pulp containing primarily soft wood fibers. - In various embodiments, if desired, the
absorbent core 38 can include an optional amount of superabsorbent material. Examples of suitable superabsorbent material can include poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), poly(acrylamide), poly(vinyl ether), maleic anhydride copolymers with vinyl ethers and α-olefins, poly(vinyl pyrrolidone), poly(vinylmorpholinone), poly(vinyl alcohol), and salts and copolymers thereof. Other superabsorbent materials can include unmodified natural polymers and modified natural polymers, such as hydrolyzed acrylonitrile-grafted starch, acrylic acid grafted starch, methyl cellulose, chitosan, carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, and natural gums, such as alginates, xanthan gum, locust bean gum, and so forth. Mixtures of natural and wholly or partially synthetic superabsorbent polymers can also be useful. The superabsorbent material can be present in theabsorbent core 38 in any amount as desired. - Regardless of the combination of absorbent materials used in the
absorbent core 38, the absorbent materials can be formed into a web structure by employing various conventional methods and techniques. For example, the absorbent web can be formed by techniques such as, but not limited to, a dry-forming technique, an air forming technique, a wet forming technique, a foam forming technique, or the like, as well as combinations thereof. A coform nonwoven material can also be employed. Methods and apparatus for carrying out such techniques are well known in the art. - The shape of the
absorbent core 38 can vary as desired and can comprise any one of various shapes including, but not limited to, triangular, rectangular, dog-bone, elliptical, trapezoidal, T-shape, I-shape, and hourglass shapes. In various embodiments, theabsorbent core 38 can have a shape that generally corresponds with the overall shape of theabsorbent article 10. The dimensions of theabsorbent core 38 can be substantially similar to those of theabsorbent article 10, however, it will be appreciated that the dimensions of theabsorbent core 38 while similar, will often be less than those of the overallabsorbent article 10, in order to be adequately contained therein. The size and the absorbent capacity of theabsorbent core 38 should be compatible with the size of the intended wearer and the liquid loading imparted by the intended use of theabsorbent article 10. Additionally, the size and the absorbent capacity of theabsorbent core 38 can be varied to accommodate wearers ranging from infants to adults. - The
absorbent core 38 can have a length ranging from about 120, 125, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, or 350 mm to about 355, 360, 380, 385, 390, 395, 400, 410, 415, 420, 425, 440, 450, 460, 480, 500, 510, 520, 530, 540, 550, 600, 610, 620, or 630 mm. Theabsorbent core 38 may have a width in thecentral region 16 ranging from about 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 65, or 70 mm to about 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170 or 180 mm. The width of theabsorbent core 38 located within theanterior region 12 and/orposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10 may range from about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125 or 130 mm. As noted herein, theabsorbent core 38 can have a length and width that can be less than or equal to the length and width of theabsorbent article 10. - In an embodiment, the
absorbent article 10 can be a diaper having the following ranges of lengths and widths of anabsorbent core 38 having an hourglass shape: the length of theabsorbent core 38 may range from about 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 225, 240 or 250 mm to about 260, 280, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, 350, 355, 360, 380, 385, or 390 mm; the width of theabsorbent core 38 in thecentral region 16 may range from about 40, 50, 55, or 60 mm to about 65, 70, 75, or 80 mm; the width of theabsorbent core 38 in theanterior region 12 and/or theposterior region 14 may range from about 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, or 110 mm. - In an embodiment, the
absorbent article 10 may be a training pant or youth pant having the following ranges of lengths and widths of anabsorbent core 38 having an hourglass shape: the length of theabsorbent core 38 may range from about 400, 410, 420, 440 or 450 mm to about 460, 480, 500, 510 or 520 mm; the width of theabsorbent core 38 in thecentral region 16 may range from about 50, 55, or 60 mm to about 65, 70, 75, or 80 mm; the width of theabsorbent core 38 in theanterior region 12 and/or theposterior region 14 may range from about 80, 85, 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, or 130 mm. - In an embodiment, the
absorbent article 10 can be an adult incontinence garment having the following ranges of lengths and widths of anabsorbent core 38 having a rectangular shape: the length of theabsorbent core 38 may range from about 400, 410 or 415 to about 425 or 450 mm; the width of theabsorbent core 38 in thecentral region 16 may range from about 90, or 95 mm to about 100, 105, or 110 mm. It should be noted that theabsorbent core 38 of an adult incontinence garment may or may not extend into either or both theanterior region 12 or theposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10. - In an embodiment, the
absorbent article 10 can be a feminine hygiene product having the following ranges of lengths and widths of anabsorbent body 40 having an hourglass shape: the length of theabsorbent core 38 may range from about 150, 160, 170, or 180 mm to about 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310 or 320 mm; the width of theabsorbent core 38 in thecentral region 16 may range from about 30, 40, or 50 mm to about 60, 70, 80, 90 or 100 mm. - By way of example, suitable materials and/or structures for the
absorbent core 38 can include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,610,678 to Weisman, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,060,636 to Yahiaoui, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,610,903 to Latimer, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 7,358,282 to Krueger, et al., and U.S. Publication No. 2010/0174260 to Di Luccio, et al. each of which is hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety. - In various embodiments, an
absorbent core 38 can be a single layer structure and can include, for example, a matrix of cellulosic fluff and superabsorbent material. In various embodiments, anabsorbent core 38 can have at least two layers of material, such as, for example, a body facing layer and a garment facing layer. In various embodiments, the two layers can be identical to each other. In various embodiments, the two layers can be different from each other. In such embodiments, the two layers can provide theabsorbent article 10 with different absorption properties as deemed suitable. In various embodiments, the body facing layer of theabsorbent core 38 may be constructed of an airlaid material and the garment facing layer of theabsorbent core 38 may be constructed of a superabsorbent polymer-containing compressed sheet. In such embodiments, the airlaid material can have a basis weight from about 40 to about 200 gsm and the superabsorbent polymer-containing compressed sheet can be a cellulosic fluff based material that can be a combination of cellulosic pulp and SAP enclosed with a tissue carrier and having a basis weight from about 40 to about 400 gsm. - Liquid Impermeable Layer:
- The liquid
impermeable layer 36 is generally liquid impermeable and is the portion of theabsorbent article 10 which faces the garments of the wearer. The liquidimpermeable layer 36 can permit the passage of air or vapor out of theabsorbent article 10 while still blocking the passage of liquids. Any liquid impermeable material may generally be utilized to form the liquidimpermeable layer 36. Theliquid impermable layer 36 can be composed of a single layer or multiple layers, and these one or more layers can themselves comprise similar or different materials. Suitable material that may be utilized can be a microporous polymeric film, such as a polyolefin film or polyethylene or polypropylene, nonwovens, and nonwoven laminates, and film/nonwoven laminates. The particular structure and composition of the liquidimpermeable layer 36 can be selected from various known films and/or fabrics with the particular material being selected as appropriate to provide the desired level of liquid barrier, strength, abrasion resistance, tactile properties, aesthetics, and so forth. In various embodiments, a polyethylene film can be utilized that can have a thickness in the range of from about 0.2 or 0.5 mils to about 3.0 or 5.0 mils. An example of a liquidimpermeable layer 36 can be a polyethylene film such as that obtainable from Pliant Corp., Schaumburg, Ill., USA. Another example can include calcium carbonate-filled polypropylene film. In still another embodiment, the liquidimpermeable layer 36 can be a hydrophobic nonwoven material with water barrier properties such as a nonwoven laminate, an example of which can be a spunbond, meltblown, meltblown, spunbons, four-layered laminate. - In various embodiments, the liquid
impermeable layer 36 can be a two layer construction, including an outer layer material and an inner layer material which can be bonded together. The outer layer can be any suitable material and may be one that provides a generally cloth-like texture or appearance to the wearer. An example of such material can be a 100% polypropylene bonded-carded web with a diamond bond pattern available from Sandler A.G., Germany, such as 30 gsm Sawabond 4185® or equivalent. Another example of material suitable for use as an outer layer can be a 20 gsm spunbond polypropylene non-woven web. The inner layer can be either vapor permeable (i.e., “breathable”) or vapor impermeable. The inner layer may be manufactured from a thin plastic film, although other liquid impermeable materials may also be used. The inner layer can inhibit liquid body exudates from leaking out of theabsorbent article 10 and wetting articles, such as bed sheets and clothing, as well as the wearer and caregiver. An example of a material for an inner layer can be a printed 19 gsm Berry Plastics XP-8695H film or equivalent commercially available from Berry Plastics Corporation, Evansville, Ind., U.S.A. - The liquid
impermeable layer 36 can, therefore, be of a single or multiple layer construction, such as of multiple film layers or laminates of film and nonwoven fibrous layers. Suitable liquidimpermeable layers 36 can be constructed from materials such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,578,069 to Whitehead, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,799 to Tusim, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,695,849 to Shawver, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,075,179 to McCormack, et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 6,376,095 to Cheung, et al., each of which are hereby incorporated by reference thereto in its entirety. - Exudate Management Layer:
- In various embodiments, the
absorbent article 10 can have anexudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with thetopsheet layer 30. In various embodiments, such as, for example, illustrated inFIGS. 3, 4A, 4B, 5, 6A, and 6B , theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned on thebody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30. In various embodiments, such as, for example, illustrated inFIGS. 7, 8A, 8B, 9A, and 9B , theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and theabsorbent core 38. - In various embodiments, the
exudate management layer 40 can be made of a material that can be capable of transferring, in the depth direction (Z), body exudates that are delivered to thetopsheet layer 30. Any of a variety of materials can be utilized as theexudate management layer 40. - In various embodiments, the material can be synthetic, cellulosic, or a combination of synthetic and cellulosic materials. In various embodiments, the
exudate management layer 40 can be constructed from woven or nonwoven materials. For example, theexudate management layer 40 can be constructed as an airlaid or a TABCW material. For example, airlaid cellulosic tissues may be suitable for use in theexudate management layer 40. The airlaid cellulosic tissue may have a basis weight ranging from about 10 or 100 gsm to about 250 or 300 gsm. The airlaid cellulosic tissue can be formed from hardwood and/or softwood fibers. An airlaid cellulosic tissue can have a fine pore structure and can provide an excellent wicking capacity. - In various embodiments, a foam material can be utilized to form the
exudate management layer 40. In various embodiments, the foam material can be an open-cell or porous foam. The physical properties of the foam material as well as its wettability and fluid management properties can be tailored to meet the specific characteristics desired for the usage of a foam material in theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, the foam material can be moisture stable and not degrade or collapse and lose its structure and fluid management properties when exposed to body exudate. In various embodiments, the foam material can be an open-cell foam, a closed cell foam, or a partially open-cell foam that is either a thermoplastic or thermoset material. A foam material can be manufactured by extrusion or casting and coating processes including frothed foam, aerated foam, and emulsion foam methods. Such foams can be manufactured from different polymer chemistries to achieve the desired softness, flexibility, and resilience of the foam material when utilized in anabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, the foam material can be based on organic or inorganic chemistries and can also be based upon a foam material obtained from natural sources. In various embodiments, the foam material can have a polymer chemistry which can be a polyurethane foam, polyolefin foam, poly(styrene-butadiene) foam, poly(ethylene-vinyl acetate) foam, or a silicone based foam. Other polymer chemistries known to one of ordinary skill in the art could be used along with additives such as plasticizers, opacifiers, colorants, antioxidants, and stabilizers to obtain the desired foam properties. In various embodiments, the viscoelastic properties could be modified to obtain a desired response to applied load from the foam material including properties similar to that commonly referred to as polyurethane memory foam materials. In various embodiments, the Poisson's ratio of the foam material could be modified to obtain the desired response from the foam material to applied stress and foam materials with auxetic properties could be considered if desired. - In various embodiments in which a foam material is utilized for the exudate management layer, the foam material can have material properties to enable cutting of the foam material such as, for example, with a mechanical die, such as foam materials which are referred to as clickable foams in the polyurethane foam industry. In various embodiments, the foam material can also be selected to enable other methods of cutting the foam material including, but not limited to, laser die cutting and water jet cutting. In various embodiments, the foam material can be tailored to enable perforating the foam material utilizing mechanical dies and cutting or hole-punching devices and can also be capable of achieving the perforation utilizing ultrasonic processes.
- A porous foam material can have pores which can vary in size and/or distribution. In various embodiments, a pore size of a foam material can be from about 10 microns to about 350 microns. In various embodiments, the foam material can have a multimodal pore size distribution in order to handle a variety of components within the body exudates. In various embodiments, a multimodal pore size distribution can be achieved within the same monolithic foam structure or could be achieved by using layers of foam material with a narrow pore size distribution which when combined into a single foam material would allow a multimodal pore size distribution to be achieved for the combination of layers.
- In various embodiments, the foam material can be a polyester polyurethane foam material. In various embodiments, the average cell size of the foam material can be from about 100, 150, or 200 microns to about 250, 300, or 350 microns. The number of open cells in the foam material can provide the foam material with measurement of the foam material's porosity. The porosity of the foam material is measured in pores per linear inch (ppi) and refers to the number of pores in one linear inch of a two-dimensional planar foam material surface and is described by the Polyurethane Foam Association. The pores per linear inch is measured by counting the pores visually under a microscope using a grid. The smaller the ppi value of the foam material the larger the pore size, and vice versa. In various embodiments, the foam material can have a porosity from about 20 or 40 ppi to about 55, 65, or 90 ppi. In various embodiments in which an open-cell foam material is utilized, the foam material can be substantially open-cell or of a completely reticulated structure. The reticulation of the foam material can be achieved by several methods known to one skilled in the art include foam made by in-situ reticulation processes during foam formation. The reticulated foam material can also be made by treating a substantially open-cell foam material to a high pressure fluid stream to remove the cell walls of the foam material. In general, foam materials are capable of stretching, however, in various embodiments the foam material can have a reduced elongation capacity. In various embodiments, the foam material can have a low elongation, such as, for example, less than a 200% elongation at break. In various embodiments, the foam material has an elongation at break from about 80 or 100% to about 150 or 200%. In various embodiments, the basis weight of the foam material can be from about 45 gsm to about 50 or 55 gsm. In various embodiments, the density of the foam material can be from about 0.01, 0.02 or 0.03 g/cc to about 0.05 or 0.08 g/cc. The foam material can also have a compression modulus that allows it to be soft and flexible when used in an absorbent article. In various embodiments, the foam material can have a compression force deflection at 25% deflection from about 0.5 or 0.6 psi to about 0.8 or 1.0 psi.
- The foam material can be either hydrophilic or hydrophobic dependent upon the desired properties of the foam material in the
absorbent article 10. In various embodiments the foam material can be a hydrophilic foam material. In various embodiments, the foam material can be hydrophobic and can be treated with a surfactant to create a hydrophilic foam material. In various embodiments, for example, the material utilized to form theexudate management layer 40 can be a hydrophobic, open-cell, polyurethane foam treated with from about 0.3% or 0.8% to about 1.6, 2.0, or 3.0% of a surfactant. In various embodiments, the surfactant utilized to treat the foam material can be a nonionic surfactant such as a nonionic surfactant comprising at least an ethoxylated linear oleochemical alcohol such as an alkylphenol ethoxylate, such as LUTENSOL® A65N, commercially available from BASF, or an ethoxylated acetylenic diol such as SURFYNOL® 465, commercially available from Air Products, Allentown, Pa. In various embodiments, the hydrophilicity of the foam material, as a result of the surfactant treatment, can be uniform in the longitudinal direction (X) and the transverse direction (Y) of the foam material. In various embodiments, the hydrophilicity of the foam material, as a result of the surfactant treatment, can vary in the longitudinal direction (X), in the transverse direction (Y), or in both of the longitudinal direction (X) and the transverse direction (Y). In various embodiments, the polymer utilized to formulate the foam material can be selected to have the desired hydrophilic properties. In various embodiments, this can be achieved by using an inherently hydrophilic polymer that is wettable by aqueous fluids or by including additives in the polymer during formation of the foam material. These additives can make the foam material wettable to aqueous fluids even if the base polymer of the foam material is hydrophobic. A non-limiting example of such an approach can be to include polyethylene glycol as an additive with a hydrophobic polymer. - In various embodiments, the foam material can be hydrophobic and can have hydrophilic fibers inserted into the foam material to create a hydrophilic foam and fiber composite. The hydrophilic fibers within the foam material can provide a hydrophilic pathway through the foam material to direct body exudates through the foam material. Referring to
FIGS. 13, 14, and 15 ,FIG. 13 is a photomicrograph (taken by scanning electron microscope at a magnification of 100×) of a cross-sectional view of a portion of a foam and fiber composite material 100 suitable for use as theexudate management layer 40,FIG. 14 is a photomicrograph (taken by scanning electron microscope at a magnification of 40×) of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite material 100 ofFIG. 13 such that the fibrous material is visible to the viewer, andFIG. 15 is a photomicrograph (taken by scanning electron microscope at a magnification of 40X) of a planar view of the foam and fiber composite 100 ofFIG. 13 such that the second planar surface of the foam material and portions of fibers are visible to the viewer. As is visible inFIGS. 13, 14, and 15 , the foam and fiber composite material 100 can be formed of an open-cell foam material 110 and a fibrous material 120. The foam material 110 can have a first planar surface 112 and a second planar surface 114. InFIG. 13 , each planar surface, 112 and 114, have been delineated by the corresponding broken lines for visual clarity. A layer of fibrous material 120 is in contact with one of the planar surfaces, such as planar surface 112, of the foam material 110. The layer of fibrous material 120 is formed from a plurality of individual fibers 122. As is visible in the foam and fiber composite material 100 shown inFIG. 13 , a portion of the individual fibers 122 can extend from the fibrous material 120 and through the foam material 110 from the first planar surface 112 of the foam material 110 to the second planar surface 114 of the foam material 110. The foam and fiber composite 100 can have a total basis weight from about 20 gsm to about 250 gsm. The amount of fibrous material 120, including individual fibers 122 which are within the foam material, is at least about 10% of the total basis weight of the foam and fiber composite 100. In various embodiments, at least about 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 or 70 gsm of fibrous material 120 is brought into contact with a planar surface, such as planar surface 112 of the foam material 110. In various embodiments, the fibrous material 120 can be formed from a plurality of individual fibers 122. In various embodiments, the individual fibers 122 of the fibrous material 120 can be a loose configuration such as may occur with wet-laying or air-laying of the fibrous material 120. In various embodiments, the individual fibers 122 of the fibrous material 120 can be in the form of a nonwoven web of material such as, for example, a carded nonwoven web. The fibrous material 120 can, therefore, be manufactured via various processes such as, but not limited to, air-laying, wet-laying, and carding. In various embodiments, the fibers 122 forming the fibrous material 120 can be hydrophilic. The fibers 122 can be naturally hydrophilic or can be fibers which are naturally hydrophobic but which have been treated to be hydrophilic, such as, for example, via a treatment with a surfactant. Providing hydrophilic fibers 122 can allow for a foam and fiber composite 100 which can have hydrophilic pathways through the foam material 110. In various embodiments in which the foam material 110 is hydrophobic, the hydrophilic pathways provided by the hydrophilic fibers 122 can allow for the foam and fiber composite 100 in anabsorbent article 10 to intake bodily exudates (via the hydrophilic fiber pathways) and maintain the body exudates in a location away from thetopsheet layer 30 of theabsorbent article 10 as the body exudates will not be able to readily pass through the hydrophobic foam material 110. In various embodiments, the fibers 122 forming the fibrous material 120 can be cellulosic fibers such as, but not limited to, cotton, ramie, jute, hemp, flax, bagasse, northern softwood kraft pulp, as well as synthetic cellulosic fibers such as, but not limited to, rayon, viscose, and cellulosic acetate. In various embodiments, the fibers 122 forming the fibrous material 120 can be synthetic fibers made from polymers such as polyethylene, polypropylene, aromatic polyesters, aliphatic polyesters, and polyamides. In such embodiments, the fibers 122 can be treated with additives to impart various degrees of surface energy ranging from very low surface energy and low wettability to high surface energy and high wettability. - The
exudate management layer 40 is formed from a base sheet of material, such as any of the materials described above, and is configured to have afirst component 50 which at least partially defines anopening 42 for direct passage of body exudates into theabsorbent core 38 and asecond component 60 connected to thefirst component 50. Thefirst component 50 can provide theexudate management layer 40 with afirst height dimension 76 and thesecond component 60 can provide theexudate management layer 40 with asecond height dimension 78 that can be greater than thefirst height dimension 76. - The
first component 50 of theexudate management layer 40 can have a first transverse direction endedge 52, a second transverse direction endedge 54, and an opposing pair of longitudinal direction side edges 56 extending between and connecting the transverse direction end edges, 52 and 54. Thefirst component 50 can generally have any shape and/or size desired. In various embodiments, for example, thefirst component 50 can have a rectangular shape, a curved rectangular shape, an oval shape, an elliptical shape, a circular shape, an hourglass shape, a square shape, or a curved square shape. In various embodiments, each of the edges, 52, 54, and 56, of thefirst component 50 can be straight. In various embodiments, at least one of the edges, 52, 54, or 56, of thefirst component 50 can be arcuate and the remaining edges can be straight. In various embodiments, at least two of the edges, 52, 54, or 56, of thefirst component 50 can be arcuate and the remaining edges can be straight. In various embodiments, for example, the longitudinal direction side edges 56 of thefirst component 50 can be straight and the transverse direction end edges, 52 and 54, can be arcuate. In various embodiments, the transverse direction end edges, 52 and 54, can have an arcuate shape which can form a complementary configuration with each other if the two edges, 52 and 54, were to be brought together. In various embodiments, at least three of the edges, 52, 54, or 56, of thefirst component 50 can be arcuate and the remaining edge can be straight. In various embodiments, all of the edges, 52, 54, and 56, of thefirst component 50 can be arcuate. - In various embodiments, the
first component 50 can have a longitudinal direction length as measured from the first transverse direction endedge 52 to the second transverse direction endedge 54 which can be less than the overall length of theabsorbent article 10. For example, thefirst component 50 can have a longitudinal length between about 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60 mm to about 100, 150, 175, 200, 250, or 300 mm. In various embodiments, thefirst component 50 can have a longitudinal direction length that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the longitudinal length of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, thefirst component 50 can have a transverse width as measured form a first longitudinaldirection side edge 56 to a second longitudinaldirection side edge 56 which can be equal to or less than the overall width of theabsorbent article 10. For example, thefirst component 50 can have a transverse width between about 10, 15, 20, or 30 mm to about 60, 80, 100, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 140, or 150 mm. In various embodiments, thefirst component 50 can have a transverse width that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, of 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the transverse width of theabsorbent article 10. Thefirst component 50 has abody facing surface 72 and agarment facing surface 74. Thefirst component 50 can provide theexudate management layer 40 with afirst height dimension 76 in the depth direction (Z) of theexudate management layer 40. In various embodiments, thefirst height dimension 76 can be from about 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, or 3.5 mm to about 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, or 10 mm. - To enhance the ability of the
absorbent article 10 to transfer body exudates in the depth direction (Z) as well as to enhance the ability of theexudate management layer 40 to conform to the wearer's body based on its ability to bend, thefirst component 50 of theexudate management layer 40 can have anopening 42 which can be any suitable shape, such as, but not limited to, ovular, circular, rectangular, square, elliptical, hourglass, triangular, etc. In various embodiments, the shape of theopening 42 can include a shape of a physical object, such as, for example, the outer shape of a leaf, an animal, a star, a heart, a tear drop, a moon, or an abstract configuration. In various embodiments, theopening 42 in thefirst component 50 can be elongate and can be oriented in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10. Theopening 42 can be bounded at least partially by aperimeter 44, which can form an inner border or inner edge of thefirst component 50, and bounded at least partially by aprimary fold 70 connecting thefirst component 50 to asecond component 60 of theexudate management layer 40. The opening 42 passes through thefirst component 50 from thebody facing surface 72 of the first component to thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. Theopening 42 can form a cup or well-like structure for holding body exudates and preventing its leakage away from a region of theabsorbent article 10 and towards the edges of theabsorbent article 10. - The
opening 42 can be located at various positions along the longitudinal and transverse directions of theabsorbent article 10 depending upon the primary location of body exudate intake within theabsorbent article 10. This variability in positioning allows theopening 42 to be positioned below the main point of body exudate discharge so that it can act as the primary body exudate receiving area for theabsorbent article 10. For example, in various embodiments, theabsorbent article 10 can have alongitudinal centerline 18 and atransverse centerline 80. It should be understood that thelongitudinal centerline 18 is disposed at a distance that is equidistant from the longitudinal direction side edges 24 and runs the length of theabsorbent article 10 in the longitudinal direction (X), while thetransverse centerline 80 is disposed at a location that is equidistant from the first transverse direction endedge 20 and the second transverse direction endedge 22 and runs along the width of theabsorbent article 10 in the transverse direction (Y). In various embodiments, theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned so that it is in symmetrical alignment with thelongitudinal centerline 18 and thetransverse centerline 80 of theabsorbent article 10. This allows theopening 42 to be centrally disposed within theabsorbent article 10. However, centralized positioning of theopening 42 in theabsorbent article 10 is not required and, in various embodiments, depending on the primary location where body exudate intake might occur within theabsorbent article 10, theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 may be either symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18 only or may not be symmetrical about either thelongitudinal centerline 18 or thetransverse centerline 80. In various embodiments, it may be desirable for theopening 42 to be shifted in the longitudinal direction (X) towards theposterior region 14 transverse direction endedge 22 to provide anabsorbent article 10 with an improved ability to receive and isolate body exudate such as fecal material. Providing anabsorbent article 10 with a structure that can receive and isolate fecal material can reduce the incidence of the fecal material contacting the wearer's genitalia as well as reduce the incidence of leakage of the fecal material from theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 may be symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18 and asymmetrical about thetransverse centerline 80. - In various embodiments, the
opening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 may be asymmetrical about each of thelongitudinal centerline 18 and thetransverse centerline 80. In various embodiments, theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned between thetransverse centerline 80 and theposterior region 14 transverse direction endedge 22 of theabsorbent article 10. In such embodiments, theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 may or may not be symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18. - The
opening 42 in theexudate management layer 40 can have a longitudinal length from about 15, 20, 30, or 50 mm to about 60, 75, 100, or 150 mm and can have a transverse width from about 10, 15, 20, or 30 mm to about 40, 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, or 130 mm. Theopening 42 in theexudate management layer 40 can have a longitudinal length that is from about 15, 20, or 25% to about 70, 75, or 80% of the overall longitudinal length of thefirst component 50 in the longitudinal direction (X). Theopening 42 in theexudate management layer 40 can have a transverse width that can be from about 20, 25, or 30% to about 70, 75, or 80% of the overall width of thefirst component 50 in the transverse direction (Y). Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 can be sized as deemed suitable for the receipt and isolation of fecal material within theabsorbent article 10. - In addition to the
first component 50, theexudate management layer 40 has asecond component 60 which is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50. Thesecond component 60 is formed from the same base sheet of material forming thefirst component 50 of theexudate management layer 40 and is connected to thefirst component 50 via aprimary fold 70 in the material forming theexudate management layer 40. Thesecond component 60 of theexudate management layer 40 extends from theprimary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10 in a direction towards theposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10. Thesecond component 60 can help shape theabsorbent article 10, create a close-to-body fit, and absorb fluid from a wearer's buttock's region. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can extend beyond the second transverse direction endedge 54 of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 may not extend beyond the second transverse direction endedge 54 of thefirst component 50. - The
second component 60 can have a first transverse direction endedge 62 which is coextensive with theprimary fold 70, a second transverse direction endedge 64 and an opposing pair of longitudinal direction side edges 66 extending between and connecting the transverse direction end edges, 62 and 64. Thesecond component 60 can generally have any shape and/or size desired. Thesecond component 60 is created by cutting, punching, or otherwise separating the material forming thesecond component 60 from the material forming thefirst component 50. Such cutting, punching, or otherwise separating of thesecond component 60 from thefirst component 50 will result in theperimeter 44 which at least partially defines theopening 42 in thefirst component 50. Thesecond component 60 is positioned into an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 by incorporating aprimary fold 70 into the material forming theexudate management layer 40. Thesecond component 60 is not fully separated from thefirst component 50 and remains attached to thefirst component 50 via theprimary fold 70. In various embodiments, as the formation of thesecond component 60 results in the formation of theopening 42, thesecond component 60 can have a shape and size which can be considered a mate of and is complementary to the shape and size of theopening 42. In such embodiments, thesecond component 60 therefore, when not in an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50, can fit entirely within theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 and the edges, 64 and 66, of thesecond component 60 can be adjacent to theperimeter 44 of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can be smaller in dimension than theopening 42, such as, for example, if thesecond component 60 is further reduced in size dimension. In such embodiments, thesecond component 60 can fit entirely within theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 but the edges of thesecond component 60 may not be adjacent to theperimeter 44 of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, a portion of thesecond component 60 may be removed from thesecond component 60 as part of the cutting or punching to form thesecond component 60 such that thesecond component 60 is not a perfect mate or is not exactly complementary to the shape and size of theopening 42. - The
second component 60 can have a longitudinal length from about 15, 20, 30, or 50 mm to about 60, 75, 100, or 150 mm and can have a transverse width from about 10, 15, 20, or 30 mm to about 40, 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, or 130 mm. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can have a longitudinal direction length that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the longitudinal length of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can have a transverse width that is from about 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40% to about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90% of the transverse width of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, the second transverse direction endedge 64 of thesecond component 60 can be from about 15 mm to about 75 mm from the second transverse direction endedge 22 of theabsorbent article 10. Thesecond component 60 can provide aheight dimension 78 to theexudate management layer 40 and thesecond height dimension 78, in the depth direction (Z), can be from about 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, or 10 mm to about 10.5, 11, 11.5, 12, 12.5, 13, 13.5, 14, 14.5, 15, 15.5, 16, 16.5, 17, 17.5, 18, 18.5, 19, 19.5, or 20 mm. - The
first component 50 and thesecond component 60 can be in an at least partially overlapping configuration with each other. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can overlap a portion of thefirst component 50 such that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, the portion of thesecond component 60 in contact with the portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50 can be bonded to each other such as, for example, by adhesive bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, etc.FIGS. 3, 4A, 4B, 8A, and 8B provide exemplary illustrations of embodiments in which thesecond component 60 overlaps a portion of thefirst component 50 so that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can underlap a portion of thefirst component 50 such that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. In various embodiments, the portion of thesecond component 60 in contact with the portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50 can be bonded to each other such as, for example, by adhesive bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, etc.FIGS. 5, 6A, 6B, 9A, and 9B , provide exemplary illustrations of embodiments in which thesecond component 60 underlaps a portion of thefirst component 50 so that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. -
FIGS. 3, 4A, and 4B provide an exemplary illustration of anabsorbent article 10 having anexudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with thetopsheet layer 30 of theabsorbent article 10. In the embodiment illustrated inFIGS. 3, 4A, and 4B , theexudate management layer 40 is positioned on thebody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is positioned such that theopening 42 is symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18 but not symmetrical about thetransverse centerline 80. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 illustrated inFIGS. 3, 4A, and 4B is positioned between thetransverse centerline 80 and theposterior region 14 transverse direction endedge 22. The transverse width of thefirst component 50 is uniform in the longitudinal direction of thefirst component 50. Theexudate management layer 40 is configured such that thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that a portion of thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape. -
FIGS. 5, 6A, and 6B provide an exemplary illustration of anabsorbent article 10 having anexudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with thetopsheet layer 30 of theabsorbent article 10. In the embodiment illustrated inFIGS. 5, 6A, and 6B , theexudate management layer 40 is positioned on thebody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is positioned such that theopening 42 is symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18 but not symmetrical about thetransverse centerline 80. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 illustrated inFIGS. 5, 6A, and 6B , is positioned between thetransverse centerline 80 and theposterior region 14 transverse direction endedge 22. The transverse width of thefirst component 50 is uniform in the longitudinal direction of thefirst component 50. Theexudate management layer 40 is configured such that thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that a portion of thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape. -
FIG. 7 provides an exemplary illustration of anabsorbent article 10 having anexudate management layer 40 in fluid communication with thetopsheet layer 30 of theabsorbent article 10. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 7 , the exudate management layer is positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and theabsorbent core 38 of theabsorbent article 10. Theexudate management layer 40 can be in contact with thegarment facing surface 34 of thetopsheet layer 30. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is positioned such that theopening 42 is symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18 but not symmetrical about thetransverse centerline 80. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is positioned between thetransverse centerline 80 and theposterior region 14 transverse direction endedge 22. The transverse width of thefirst component 50 is uniform in the longitudinal direction of thefirst component 50.FIGS. 8A and 8B provide exemplary illustrations of an embodiment of anexudate management layer 40 which can be present in theabsorbent article 10 ofFIG. 7 . As illustrated inFIGS. 8A and 8B , the exudate management layer is configured such that thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that a portion of thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape.FIGS. 9A and 9B provide exemplary illustrations of an embodiment of anexudate management layer 40 which can be present in theabsorbent article 10 ofFIG. 7 . As illustrated inFIGS. 9A and 9B , the exudate management layer is configured such that thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that a portion of thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. Theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40 is generally circular in shape. - In various embodiments, the
second component 60 can have asecondary fold 68. Thesecondary fold 68 can be a fold within thesecond component 60 and can bring afirst portion 82 of thesecond component 60 into contact with asecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60.FIGS. 16A-16D provide exemplary illustrations of cross-sectional side views taken in the longitudinal direction of exemplary exudate management layers 40 in which thesecond component 60 has asecondary fold 68. Theexudate management layer 40 illustrated inFIGS. 16A-16D has afirst component 50 connected to asecond component 60 via theprimary fold 70 and wherein thefirst component 50 and thesecond component 60 are in a partially overlapping configuration. Referring toFIG. 16A , thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50. Thesecond component 60 further has asecondary fold 68 which brings afirst portion 82 of thesecond component 60 into contact with asecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60. Thefirst portion 82 can be in an underlapping configuration with thesecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60. Referring toFIG. 16B , thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thebody facing surface 72 of thefirst component 50. Thesecond component 60 further has asecondary fold 68 which brings afirst portion 82 of thesecond component 60 into contact with asecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60. Thefirst portion 82 can be in an overlapping configuration with thesecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60. Referring toFIG. 16C , thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. Thesecond component 60 further has asecondary fold 68 which brings afirst portion 82 of thesecond component 60 into contact with asecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60. Thefirst portion 82 can be in an overlapping configuration with thesecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60. Referring toFIG. 16D , thesecond component 60 is in an at least partially underlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 such that thesecond component 60 is in contact with a portion of thegarment facing surface 74 of thefirst component 50. Thesecond component 60 further has asecondary fold 68 which brings afirst portion 82 of thesecond component 60 into contact with asecond portion 84 of the second component. While the embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 16A-16D illustrate a singlesecondary fold 68 in thesecond components 60, it is to be understood that thesecond component 68 can have more than onesecondary fold 68. While the embodiments illustrated inFIGS. 16A-16D illustrate thesecondary fold 68 of thesecond component 60 to be in a location beyond the second transverse direction endedge 54 of thefirst component 50, it is to be understood that thesecondary fold 68 can occur close in proximity to the second transverse direction endedge 54 of thefirst component 50 or can occur such that the resulting overlapping configuration of afirst portion 82 andsecond portion 84 of thesecond component 60 can occur in an overlapping configuration with thefirst component 50 of theexudate management layer 40. - Referring to
FIG. 17 , in various embodiments, thesecond component 60 of theexudate management layer 40 can have at least oneopening 88 which can be any suitable shape, such as, but not limited to, ovular, circular, rectangular, square, elliptical, hourglass, triangle, etc. In various embodiments, the shape of theopening 88 can include a shape of a physical object, such as, for example, the outer shape of a leaf, an animal, a star, a heart, a tear drop, a moon, or an abstract configuration. In various embodiments, theopening 88 can be elongate and can be oriented in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10. Theopening 88 can be bounded by aperimeter 90 which can form an inner border or inner edge of thesecond component 60. Theopening 88 in thesecond component 60 can pass through thesecond component 60 from the body facing surface of thesecond component 60 to the garment facing surface of thesecond component 60. In the event of body exudate coming into the location of theopening 88 in the second component, theopening 88 can form a cup or well-like structure for holding body exudate and preventing its leakage away from a region of theabsorbent article 10 and towards the edges of theabsorbent article 10. Theopening 88 can be located at various positions of thesecond component 60. In various embodiments, thesecond component 60 can have more than oneopening 88 and the plurality ofopenings 88 can be arranged in thesecond component 60 in any manner deemed suitable. In various embodiments, theopening 88 can be formed by cutting, punching, or otherwise separating a first portion of the material forming thesecond component 60 from a second portion of material forming thesecond component 60. The second portion of material forming thesecond component 60 is that portion of material which remains as thesecond component 60 of theexudate management layer 40 and is connected to thefirst component 50 via theprimary fold 70. In various embodiments, the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming thesecond component 60 can be discarded. In various embodiments, the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming thesecond component 60 can be bonded to theabsorbent core 38 and can form projection(s) 86 extending upward, in the depth direction (Z) from the body facing surface of theabsorbent core 38. The material forming the projection(s) 86 can be bonded to theabsorbent core 38 prior to or after the cutting, punching, or otherwise separating the first portion of material forming thesecond component 60 from the second portion of material forming thesecond component 60. - Referring to
FIG. 18 , in various embodiments, theabsorbent core 38 can have at least oneopening 94 which can be any suitable shape, such as, but not limited to, ovular, circular, rectangular, square, elliptical, hourglass, triangle, etc. In various embodiments, the shape of theopening 94 can include a shape of a physical object, such as, for example, the outer shape of a leaf, an animal, a star, a heart, a tear drop, a moon, or an abstract configuration. In various embodiments, theopening 94 can be elongate and can be oriented in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10. Theopening 94 can be bounded by aperimeter 96 which can form an inner border or inner edge of theabsorbent core 38. Theopening 94 in theabsorbent core 38 passes through theabsorbent core 38 from the body facing surface of theabsorbent core 38 to the garment facing surface of theabsorbent core 38. In the event of body exudate coming into the location of theopening 94 in theabsorbent core 38, theopening 94 can form a cup or well-like structure for holding the body exudate and preventing its leakage away from a region of theabsorbent article 10 and towards the edges of theabsorbent article 10. Theopening 94 can be located at various positions of theabsorbent core 38 and within the region of theabsorbent core 38 visible through theopening 42 of theexudate management layer 40. In various embodiments, theabsorbent core 38 can have more than oneopening 94 and the plurality ofopenings 94 can be arranged in theabsorbent core 38 in any manner deemed suitable. Theopening 94 in theabsorbent core 38 can be formed by cutting, punching, or otherwise separating a first portion of material forming theabsorbent core 38 from a second portion of material forming theabsorbent core 38. The second portion of material forming theabsorbent core 38 is that portion of material which remains as theabsorbent core 38 of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming theabsorbent core 38 can be discarded. In various embodiments, the first portion of the material which has been cut, punched, or otherwise separated from the second portion of material forming theabsorbent core 38 can be bonded to thesecond component 60 of theexudate management layer 40 and can form projection(s) 92 extending upward, in the depth direction (Z) from the body facing surface of thesecond component 60. The material forming the projection(s) 92 can be bonded to thesecond component 60 prior to or after the cutting, punching, or otherwise separating of thesecond component 60 from thefirst component 50 of theexudate management layer 40. - As described herein, the
exudate management layer 40 has afirst component 50 which at least partially defines anopening 42 and asecond component 60 connected to thefirst component 50 via aprimary fold 70. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can have a third component connected to thefirst component 50 via a third component primary fold. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can have a third component and a fourth component wherein each of the third component and fourth component is connected to thefirst component 50 via their own component primary folds. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can have a third component, a fourth component, and a fifth component connected to thefirst component 50 via their own component primary folds. Referring toFIG. 19 ,FIG. 19 provides an exemplary illustration of anexudate management layer 40 having afirst component 50, asecond component 60 connected to thefirst component 50 viaprimary fold 70, athird component 130 connected to thefirst component 50 via third componentprimary fold 132, and anopening 42 defined by thefirst component 50, theprimary fold 70, and the third componentprimary fold 132. Thesecond component 60 can extend from theprimary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10 in a direction towards theposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10 and thethird component 130 can extend from the third componentprimary fold 132 in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10 in a direction towards theanterior region 12 of theabsorbent article 10.FIG. 20 provides an exemplary illustration of anexudate management layer 40 having afirst component 50, asecond component 60 connected to thefirst component 50 viaprimary fold 70, athird component 142 connected to the first component via third componentprimary fold 144, afourth component 146 connected to thefirst component 50 via fourth componentprimary fold 148, and anopening 42 defined by thefirst component 50, theprimary fold 70, the third componentprimary fold 144, and the fourth componentprimary fold 148. In the embodiments illustrated inFIG. 20 , thesecond component 60 can extend from theprimary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10 in a direction towards theposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10, thethird component 142 can extend from the third componentprimary fold 144 in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10, and thefourth component 146 can extend from the fourth componentprimary fold 148 in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10.FIG. 21 provides an exemplary illustration of anexudate management layer 40 having afirst component 50, asecond component 60 connected to thefirst component 50 viaprimary fold 70, athird component 130 connected to thefirst component 50 via third componentprimary fold 132, afourth component 134 connected to thefirst component 50 via fourth componentprimary fold 136, afifth component 138 connected to thefirst component 50 via fifth componentprimary fold 140, and anopening 42 defined by thefirst component 50, theprimary fold 70, the third componentprimary fold 132, the fourth componentprimary fold 136, and the fifth componentprimary fold 140. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 21 , thesecond component 60 can extend from theprimary fold 70 in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10 in a direction towards theposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10, thethird component 130 can extend from the third componentprimary fold 132 in the longitudinal direction (X) of theabsorbent article 10 in a direction towards theanterior region 12 of theabsorbent article 10, thefourth component 134 can extend from the fourth componentprimary fold 136 in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10, and thefifth component 138 can extend from the fifth componentprimary fold 140 in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. - In various embodiments, such as, for example illustrated in
FIG. 22 , theexudate management layer 40 can have at least twoopenings 42 for the capture and containment of fecal material. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can have at least 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5openings 42. Each of theopenings 42 can have any shape deemed suitable such as, for example, described herein. Each of theopenings 42 can be bounded at least partially by aperimeter 44 and at least partially by aprimary fold 70 of their respectivesecond component 60. The plurality ofopenings 42 can be arranged in theexudate management layer 40 in any manner deemed suitable. In various embodiments, at least one of the plurality ofopenings 42 can be symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18. In various embodiments, none of theopenings 42 is symmetrical about thelongitudinal centerline 18. In various embodiments, one of the plurality ofopenings 42 can be positioned that that a portion of theopening 42 crosses over thetransverse centerline 80. In various embodiments, each of theopenings 42 is positioned between thetransverse centerline 80 and the second transverse direction endedge 22 of theabsorbent article 10. - Containment Flaps:
- In various embodiments, the absorbent article can have containment flaps.
FIGS. 2, 3, 5, and 7 provide illustrations of exemplary embodiments of anabsorbent article 10 with containment flaps, 210 and 212. In various embodiments, containment flaps, 210 and 212, can be secured to thetopsheet layer 30 of theabsorbent article 10 in a generally parallel, spaced relation with each other laterally inward of the longitudinal direction side edges 24 to provide a barrier against the flow of body exudates in the transverse direction (Y) of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, the containment flaps, 210 and 212, can extend longitudinally from theanterior region 12 of theabsorbent article 10, through thecentral region 16 to theposterior region 14 of theabsorbent article 10. - The containment flaps, 210 and 212, can be constructed of a fibrous material which can be similar to the material forming the
topsheet layer 30. Other conventional material, such as polymer films, can also be employed. Each containment flap, 210 and 212, can have a moveabledistal end 214 which can includeflap elastics 216. Suitable elastic materials for the flap elastics 216 can include sheets, strands or ribbons of natural rubber, synthetic rubber, or thermoplastic elastomeric materials. In various embodiments, the flap elastics 216 can have two strands of elastomeric material extending longitudinally along the distal ends 214 of the containment flaps, 210 and 212, in generally parallel, spaced relation with each other. The elastic strands can be within the containment flaps, 210 and 212, while in an elastically contractible condition such that contraction of the strands gathers and shortens the distal ends 214 of the containment flaps, 210 and 212. As a result, the elastic strands can bias the distal ends 214 of each containment flap, 210 and 212, toward a position spaced from the proximal end of the containment flaps, 210 and 212, so that the containment flaps, 210 and 212, can extend away from thetopsheet layer 30 in a generally upright orientation of the containment flaps, 210 and 212, especially in thecentral region 16 of theabsorbent article 10, when theabsorbent article 10 is fitted on the wearer. Thedistal end 214 of the containment flaps, 210 and 212, can be connected to the flap elastics 216 by partially doubling the containment flap, 210 and 212, material back upon itself by an amount which can be sufficient to enclose theflap elastics 216. It is to be understood, however, that the containment flaps, 210 and 212, can have any number of strands of elastomeric material and may also be omitted from theabsorbent article 10 without departing from the scope of this disclosure. - In various embodiments, such as, for example, illustrated in
FIGS. 3, 4A, 4B, 5, 6A, and 6B , theabsorbent article 10 can have anexudate management layer 40 positioned on thebody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can be sized and positioned such that the longitudinal direction side edges 56 of thefirst component 50 of theexudate management layer 40 are located underneath the containment flaps, 210 and 212, of theabsorbent article 10. In various embodiments, portions of thefirst component 50 such as, for example, at least portions of the longitudinal direction side edges 56, can be bonded to the containment flaps, 210 and 212. In such embodiments, when the containment flaps, 210 and 212, extend away from thetopsheet layer 30 in a generally upright orientation of the containment flaps, 210 and 212, theexudate management layer 40 can be elevated away from thetopsheet layer 30 and provide a close to body fit of theabsorbent article 10 to the body of the wearer. In various embodiments, the transverse direction end edges, 52ad 54, of thefirst component 50 can be bonded to thetopsheet layer 30 so as to create a pocket for the body exudate when theexudate management layer 40 is elevated away from thetopsheet layer 30 as the containment flaps, 210 and 212, are in a generally upright orientation during usage of theabsorbent article 10. - Acquisition Layer:
- In various embodiments, the
absorbent article 10 can have an acquisition layer. The acquisition layer can help decelerate and diffuse surges or gushes of liquid body exudates penetrating thetopsheet layer 30. In various embodiments, theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned on thebody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30 and the acquisition layer can be positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and theabsorbent core 38. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer can be positioned on thebody facing surface 32 of thetopsheet layer 30 and theexudate management layer 40 can be positioned on the body facing surface of the acquisition layer. In various embodiments, anabsorbent article 10 can have anexudate management layer 40 positioned between thetopsheet layer 30 and theabsorbent core 38 with an acquisition layer positioned between theexudate management layer 40 and theabsorbent core 38. - The acquisition layer may have any longitudinal length dimension as deemed suitable. In various embodiments, the longitudinal length of the acquisition layer can be the same as the longitudinal length of the
absorbent core 38. In various embodiments, the longitudinal length of the acquisition layer can be shorter than the longitudinal length of theabsorbent core 38. In such embodiments, the acquisition layer may be positioned at any desired location along the longitudinal length of theabsorbent core 38. - In an embodiment, the acquisition layer can include natural fibers, synthetic fibers, superabsorbent material, woven material, nonwoven material, wet-laid fibrous webs, a substantially unbounded airlaid fibrous web, an operatively bonded, stabilized-airlaid fibrous web, or the like, as well as combinations thereof. In an embodiment, the acquisition layer can be formed from a material that is substantially hydrophobic, such as a nonwoven web composed of polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, and the like, and combinations thereof. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer can include conjugate, biconstituent, and/or homopolymer fibers of staple or other lengths and mixtures of such fibers with other types of fibers. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer can have fibers which can have a denier of greater than about 5. In various embodiments, the acquisition layer can have fibers which can have a denier of less than about 5.
- In various embodiments, the acquisition layer can be a bonded carded web or an airlaid web. In various embodiments, the bonded carded web may be, for example, a powder bonded carded web, an infrared bonded carded web, or a through air bonded carded web.
- In various embodiments, the basis weight of the acquisition layer can be at least about 10 or 20 gsm. In various embodiments, the basis weight of the acquisition layer can be from about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 or 60 gsm to about 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 110, 120, or 130 gsm. In various embodiments, the basis weight of the acquisition layer can be less than about 130, 120, 110, 100, 90, 85, 80, 75, 70, 65, 60 or 50 gsm.
- Side Panels:
-
FIG. 23 provides an illustration of an exemplary embodiment of a perspective view of anabsorbent article 10 such as a pant, such as, for example, a training pant, youth pant, diaper pant, or an adult incontinence pant. In an embodiment in which theabsorbent article 10 can be a training pant, youth pant, diaper pant, or adult incontinence pant, theabsorbent article 10 may have front side panels, 260 and 262, and rear side panels, 264 and 266.FIG. 23 provides a non-limiting illustration of anabsorbent article 10 that can have side panels, such as front side panels, 260 and 262, and rear side panels, 264 and 266. Thefront side panels rear side panels absorbent article 10 can be bonded to theabsorbent article 10 in the respective anterior and posterior regions, 12 and 14, and can extend outwardly beyond the longitudinal side edges 24 of theabsorbent article 10. In an example, the front side panels, 260 and 262, can be bonded to the liquidimpermeable layer 36 such as being bonded thereto by adhesive, by pressure bonding, by thermal bonding or by ultrasonic bonding. The back side panels, 264 and 266, may be secured to the liquidimpermeable layer 36 in substantially the same manner as the front side panels, 260 and 262. Alternatively, the front side panels, 260 and 262, and the back side panels, 264 and 266, may be formed integrally with theabsorbent article 10, such as by being formed integrally with the liquidimpermeable layer 36, thetopsheet layer 30 or other layers of theabsorbent article 10. - For improved fit and appearance, the front side panels, 260 and 262, and the back side panels, 264 and 266, can suitably have an average length measured parallel to the
longitudinal centerline 18 of theabsorbent article 10 that is about 20 percent or greater, and more suitably about 25 percent or greater, of the overall length of theabsorbent article 10, also measured parallel to thelongitudinal centerline 18. For example,absorbent articles 10 having an overall length of about 54 centimeters, the front side panels, 260 and 262, and the back side panels, 264 and 266, suitably have an average length of about 10 centimeters or greater, and more suitably have an average length of about 15 centimeters. Each of the front side panels, 260 and 262, and back side panels, 264 and 266, can be constructed of one or more individual, distinct pieces of material. For example, each front side panel, 260 and 262, and back side panel, 264 and 266, can include first and second side panel portions (not shown) joined at a seam (not shown), with at least one of the portions including an elastomeric material. Alternatively, each individual front side panel, 260 and 262, and back side panel, 264 and 266, can be constructed of a single piece of material folded over upon itself along an intermediate fold line (not shown). - The front side panels, 260 and 262, and back side panels, 264 and 266, can each have an
outer edge 270 spaced laterally from theengagement seam 272, aleg end edge 274 disposed toward the longitudinal center of theabsorbent article 10, and awaist end edge 276 disposed toward a longitudinal end of theabsorbent article 10. Theleg end edge 274 andwaist end edge 276 can extend from the longitudinal side edges 24 of theabsorbent article 10 to the outer edges 270. The leg end edges 274 of the front side panels, 260 and 262, and back side panels, 264 and 266, can form part of the longitudinal side edges 24 of theabsorbent article 10. The leg end edges 274 of the illustratedabsorbent article 10 can be curved and/or angled relative to thetransverse centerline 80 to provide a better fit around the wearer's legs. However, it is understood that only one of the leg end edges 274 can be curved or angled, such as theleg end edge 274 of theposterior region 14, or neither of the leg end edges 274 can be curved or angled, without departing from the scope of this disclosure. The waist end edges 276 can be parallel to thetransverse centerline 80. The waist end edges 276 of the front side panels, 260 and 262, can form part of the first transverse direction endedge 20 of theabsorbent article 10, and the waist end edges 276 of the back side panels, 264 and 266, can form part of the second transverse direction endedge 22 of theabsorbent article 10. - The front side panels, 260 and 262, and back side panels, 264 and 266, can include an elastic material capable of stretching laterally. Suitable elastic materials, as well as one described process for incorporating elastic front side panels, 260 and 262, and back side panels, 264 and 266, into an
absorbent article 10 are described in the following U.S. Pat. No. 4,940,464 issued Jul. 10, 1990 to Van Gompel et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,224,405 issued Jul. 6, 1993 to Pohjola, U.S. Pat. No. 5,104,116 issued Apr. 14, 1992 to Pohjola, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,046,272 issued Sep. 10, 1991 to Vogt et al.; all of which are incorporated herein by reference. As an example, suitable elastic materials include a stretch-thermal laminate (STL), a neck-bonded laminate (NBL), a reversibly necked laminate, or a stretch-bonded laminate (SBL) material. Methods of making such materials are well known to those skilled in the art and described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,663,220 issued May 5, 1987 to Wisneski et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,226,992 issued Jul. 13, 1993 to Morman, and European Patent Application No. EP 0 217 032 published on Apr. 8, 1987, in the names of Taylor et al., and PCT Application WO 01/88245 in the name of Welch et al., all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other suitable materials are described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/649,508 to Welch et al. and Ser. No. 12/023,447 to Lake et al., all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, the front side panels, 260 and 262, and back side panels, 264 and 266, may include other woven or non-woven materials, such as those described above as being suitable for the liquidimpermeable layer 36. - Method to Determine Percent Open Area:
- The percentage of open area can be determined by using the image analysis measurement method described herein. In this context, the open area is considered the regions within a material where light transmitted from a light source passes directly thru those regions unhindered in the material of interest. Generally, the image analysis method determines a numeric value of percent open area for a material via specific image analysis measurement parameters such as area. The percent open area method is performed using conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect open area regions in both land areas and projections separately and then calculating their percentages in each. To separate land areas and projections for subsequent detection and measurement, incident lighting is used along with image processing steps. An image analysis system, controlled by an algorithm, performs detection, image processing and measurement and also transmits data digitally to a spreadsheet database. The resulting measurement data are used to determine the percent open area of materials possessing land areas and projections.
- The method for determining the percent open area in both land areas and projections of a given material includes the step of acquiring two separate digital images of the material. An exemplary setup for acquiring the image is representatively illustrated in
FIG. 24 . Specifically, a CCD video camera 300 (e.g., aLeica DFC 310 FX video camera operated in gray scale mode and available from Leica Microsystems of Heerbrugg, Switzerland) is mounted on astandard support 302 such as a Polaroid MP-4 Land Camera standard support or equivalent available from Polaroid Resource Center in Cambridge, Miss. Thestandard support 302 is attached to a macro-viewer 304 such as a KREONITE macro-viewer available from Dunning Photo Equipment, Inc., having an office in Bixby, Okla. Anauto stage 308 is placed on theupper surface 306 of the macro-viewer 304. Theauto stage 308 is used to automatically move the position of a given material for viewing by thecamera 300. A suitable auto stage is Model H112, available from Prior Scientific Inc., having an office in Rockland, Mass. - The material possessing land areas and projections is placed on the
auto stage 308 under the optical axis of a 60 mm Nikon AFMicro Nikkor lens 310 with an f-stop setting of 4. TheNikon lens 310 is attached to theLeica DFC 310FX camera 300 using a c-mount adaptor. The distance D1 from thefront face 312 of theNikon lens 310 to the material is 21 cm. The material is laid flat on theauto stage 308 and any wrinkles removed by gentle stretching and/or fastening it to theauto stage 308 surface using transparent adhesive tape at its outer edges. The material is oriented so the machine-direction (MD) runs in the horizontal direction of the resulting image. The material surface is illuminated with incident fluorescent lighting provided by a 16 inch diameter, 40 watt, GECircline fluorescent lamp 314. Thelamp 314 is contained in a fixture that is positioned so it is centered over the material and under the video camera above and is a distance D2 of 3 inches above the material surface. The illumination level of thelamp 314 is controlled with a Variable Auto-transformer, type 3PN1010, available from Staco Energy Products Co. having an office in Dayton, Ohio Transmitted light is also provided to the material from beneath theauto stage 308 by a bank of five 20watt fluorescent lights 316 covered with a diffusingplate 318. The diffusingplate 318 is inset into, and forms a portion of, theupper surface 306 of the macro-viewer 304. The diffusingplate 318 is overlaid with ablack mask 320 possessing a 3-inch by 3-inch opening 322. Theopening 322 is positioned so that it is centered under the optical axis of the Leica camera and lens system. The distance D3 from theopening 322 to the surface of theauto stage 308 is approximately 17 cm. The illumination level of the fluorescentlight bank 316 is also controlled with a separate Variable Auto-transformer. - The image analysis software platform used to perform the percent open area measurements is a QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, having an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland. The system and images are also calibrated using the QWIN software and a standard ruler with metric markings at least as small as one millimeter. The calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Units of millimeters per pixel are used for the calibration.
- The method for determining the percent open area of a given material includes the step of performing several area measurements from both incident and transmitted light images. Specifically, an image analysis algorithm is used to acquire and process images as well as perform measurements using Quantimet User Interactive Programming System (QUIPS) language. The image analysis algorithm is reproduced below.
-
NAME = % Open Area - Land vs Projection Regions-1 PURPOSE = Measures % open area on ′land′ and ′projection′ regions via ′sandwich′ lighting technique DEFINE VARIABLES & OPEN FILES Open File ( C:\Data\39291\% Open Area\data.xls, channel #1) MFLDIMAGE = 2 TOTCOUNT = 0 TOTFIELDS = 0 SAMPLE ID AND SET UP Configure (Image Store 1392 × 1040, Grey Images 81, Binaries 24) Enter Results Header File Results Header (channel #1) File Line (channel #1) Image Setup DC Twain [PAUSE] ( Camera 1, AutoExposure Off, Gain 0.00, ExposureTime 34.23 msec, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) Measure frame (x 31, y 61, Width 1330, Height 978) Image frame (x 0, y 0, Width 1392, Height 1040) -- Calvalue = 0.0231 mm/px CALVALUE = 0.0231 Calibrate ( CALVALUE CALUNITS$ per pixel) Clear Accepts For (SAMPLE = 1 to 1, step 1) Clear Accepts File (″Field No.″, channel #1, field width: 9, left justified ) File (″Land Area″, channel #1, field width: 9, left justified ) File (″Land Open Area″, channel #1, field width: 13, left justified ) File (″%Open Land Area″, channel #1, field width: 15, left justified ) File (″Proj. Area″, channel # 1, field width: 9, left justified )File (″Proj. Open Area″, channel # 1, field width: 13, left justified )File (″% Open Proj. Area″, channel # 1, field width: 15, left justified )File (″Total % Open Area″, channel # 1, field width: 14, left justified )File Line (channel #1 ) Stage ( Define Origin ) Stage ( Scan Pattern, 5 × 1 fields, size 82500.000000 x 82500.000000 ) IMAGE ACQUISITION I - Projection isolation For ( FIELD = 1 to 5, step 1) Display (ImageO (on), frames (on,on), planes (off,off,off,off,off,off), lut 0, x 0, y 0, z 1, Reduction off) PauseText (″Ensure incident lighting is correct (WL = 0.88 - 0.94) and acquire image.″) Image Setup DC Twain [PAUSE] ( Camera 1, AutoExposure Off, Gain 0.00,ExposureTime 34.23 msec, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) Acquire (into ImageO ) DETECT - Projections only PauseText (″Ensure that threshold is set at least to the right of the left gray-level histogram peak which corresponds to the ′land′ region.″) Detect [PAUSE] (whiter than 127, from ImageO into BinaryO delineated ) BINARY IMAGE PROCESSING Binary Amend (Close from BinaryO to Binaryl, cycles 10, operator Disc, edge erode on) Binary Identify ( Fill Holes from Binaryl to Binaryl ) Binary Amend (Open from Binaryl to Binary2, cycles 20, operator Disc, edge erode on) Binary Amend (Close from Binary2 to Binary3, cycles 8, operator Disc, edge erode on ) PauseText (″Toggle <control> and <b> keys to check bump detection and correct if necessary.″) Binary Edit [PAUSE] ( Draw from Binary3 to Binary3, nib Fill, width 2 ) Binary Logical (copy Binary3, inverted to Binary4 ) IMAGE ACQUISITION 2 - % Open Area Display (ImageO (on), frames (on,on), planes (off,off,off,off,off,off), lut 0, x 0, y 0, z 1, Reduction off) PauseText (″Turn off incident light & ensure transmitted lighting is correct (WL = 0.97) and acquire image.″) Image Setup DC Twain [PAUSE] (Camera 1, AutoExposure Off, Gain 0.00, ExposureTime 34.23 msec, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83) Acquire (into ImageO ) DETECT - Open areas only Detect (whiter than 210, from ImageO into BinarylO delineated ) BINARY IMAGE PROCESSING Binary Logical (C = AANDB: C Binary11, A Binary3, B BinarylO) Binary Logical (C = AANDB: C Binary12, A Binary4, B BinarylO) MEASURE AREAS - Land, projections, open area within each -- Land Area MFLDIMAGE = 4 Measure field (plane MFLDIMAGE, into FLDRESULTS(1), statistics into FLDSTATS(7,1)) Selected parameters: Area LANDAREA = FLDRESULTS(1) -- Projection Area MFLDIMAGE = 3 Measure field (plane MFLDIMAGE, into FLDRESULTS(1), statistics into FLDSTATS(7,1)) Selected parameters: Area BUMPAREA = FLDRESULTS(I) -- Open Projection area MFLDIMAGE = 11 Measure field (plane MFLDIMAGE, into FLDRESULTS(I), statistics into FLDSTATS(7,1)) Selected parameters: Area APBUMPAREA = FLDRESULTS(I) -- Open land area MFLDIMAGE = 12 Measure field (plane MFLDIMAGE, into FLDRESULTS(1), statistics into FLDSTATS(7,1)) Selected parameters: Area APLANDAREA = FLDRESULTS(1) -- Total % open area MFLDIMAGE = 10 Measure field (plane MFLDIMAGE, into FLDRESULTS(1), statistics into FLDSTATS(7,1)) Selected parameters: Area% TOTPERCAPAREA = FLDRESULTS(1) CALCULATE AND OUTPUT AREAS PERCAPLANDAREA = APLANDAREA/LANDAREA*100 PERCAPBUMPAREA = APBUMPAREA/BUMPAREA*100 File ( FIELD, channel # , 0 digits after) File ( LANDAREA, channel #1,2 digits after) File (APLANDAREA, channel #1,2 digits after) File ( PERCAPLANDAREA, channel #1,1 digit after) File ( BUMPAREA, channel #1,2 digits after) File (APBUMPAREA, channel #1,4 digits after) File ( PERCAPBUMPAREA, channel #1,5 digits after) File (TOTPERCAPAREA, channel #1,2 digits after) File Line (channel #1) Stage (Step, Wait until stopped + 1100 msecs) Next (FIELD) PauseText (″If no more samples, enter ′0.′″) Input (FINISH) If (FINISH=0) Goto OUTPUT Endif PauseText (″Place the next replicate specimen on the auto-stage, turn on incident light and turn-off and/or block sub-stage lighting.″) Image Setup DC Twain [PAUSE] ( Camera 1, AutoExposure Off, Gain 0.00,ExposureTime 34.23 msec, Brightness 0, Lamp 38.83 ) File Line (channel #1) Next (SAMPLE) OUTPUT: Close File ( channel # 1END - The QUIPS algorithm is executed using the QWIN Pro software platform. The analyst is initially prompted to enter the material set information which is sent to the EXCEL file.
- The analyst is next prompted by a live image set up window on the computer monitor screen to place a material onto the auto-
stage 308. The material should be laid flat and gentle force applied at its edges to remove any macro-wrinkles that may be present. It should also be aligned so that the machine direction runs horizontally in the image. At this time, theCircline fluorescent lamp 314 can be on to assist in positioning the material. Next, the analyst is prompted to adjust the incidentCircline fluorescent lamp 314 via the Variable Auto-transformer to a white level reading of approximately 0.9. The sub-stage transmittedlight bank 316 should either be turned off at this time or masked using a piece of light-blocking, black construction paper placed over the 3 inch by 3inch opening 322. - The analyst is now prompted to ensure that the detection threshold is set to the proper level for detection of the projections using the Detection window which is displayed on the computer monitor screen. Typically, the threshold is set using the white mode at a point approximately near the middle of the 8-bit gray-level range (e.g. 127). If necessary, the threshold level can be adjusted up or down so that the resulting detected binary will optimally encompass the projections shown in the acquired image with respect to their boundaries with the surrounding land region.
- After the algorithm automatically performs several binary image processing steps on the detected binary of the projections, the analyst will be given an opportunity to re-check projection detection and correct any inaccuracies. The analyst can toggle both the ‘control’ and ‘b’ keys simultaneously to re-check projection detection against the underlying acquired gray-scale image. If necessary, the analyst can select from a set of binary editing tools (e.g. draw, reject, etc.) to make any minor adjustments. If care is taken to ensure proper illumination and detection in the previously described steps, little or no correction at this point should be necessary.
- Next, the analyst is prompted to turn off the incident
Circline fluorescent lamp 314 and either turn on the sub-stage transmitted light bank or remove the light blocking mask. The sub-stage transmitted light bank is adjusted by the Variable Auto-transformer to a white level reading of approximately 0.97. At this point, the image focus can be optimized for the land areas of the material. - The algorithm, after performing additional operations on the resulting separate binary images for projections, land areas and open area, will then automatically perform measurements and output the data into a designated EXCEL spreadsheet file. The following measurement parameter data will be located in the EXCEL file after measurements and data transfer has occurred:
- Land Area
- Land Open Area
- Land % Open Area
- Projection Area
- Projection Open Area
- Projection % Open Area
- Total % Open Area
- Following the transfer of data, the algorithm will direct the auto-
stage 308 to move to the next field-of-view and the process of turning on the incident,Circline fluorescent lamp 314 and blocking the transmittedsub-stage lighting bank 316 will begin again. This process will repeat four times so that there will be five sets of data from five separate field-of-view images per single material replicate. - Multiple sampling replicates from a single material can be performed during a single execution of the QUIPS algorithm (Note: The Sample For—Next line in the algorithm needs to be adjusted to reflect the number of material replicate analyses to be performed per material). The final material mean spread value is usually based on an N=5 analysis from five, separate, material subsample replicates. A comparison between different materials can be performed using a Student's T analysis at the 90% confidence level.
- Method to Determine Height of Projections Test Method:
- The height of the projections can be determined by using the image analysis measurement method described herein. The image analysis method determines a dimensional numeric height value for projections using specific image analysis measurements of both land areas and projections with underlying land regions in a sample and then calculating the projection height alone by difference between the two. The projection height method is performed using conventional optical image analysis techniques to detect cross-sectional regions of both land areas and projection structures and then measure a mean linear height value for each when viewed using a camera with incident lighting. The resulting measurement data are used to compare the projection height characteristics of different types of body-side intake layers.
- Prior to performing image analysis measurements, the sample of interest must be prepared in such a way to allow visualization of a representative cross-section that passes thru the center of a projection. Cross-sectioning can be performed by anchoring a representative piece of the sample on at least one of its cross-machine running straight edges on a flat, smooth surface with a strip of tape such as ¾ inch SCOTCH® Magic™ tape produced by 3M. Cross-sectioning is then performed by using a new, previously unused single edge carbon steel blue blade (PAL) and carefully cutting in a direction away from and orthogonal to the anchored edge and thru the centers of at least one projection and preferably more if projections are arranged in rows running in the machine direction. Any remaining rows of projections located behind the cross-sectioned face of projections should be cut away and removed prior to mounting so that only cross-sectioned projections of interest are present. Such blades for cross-sectioning can be acquired from Electron Microscopy Sciences of Hatfield, Pa. (Cat. #71974). Cross-sectioning is performed in the machine-direction of the sample, and a fresh, previously unused blade should be used for each new cross-sectional cut. The cross-sectioned face can now be mounted so that the projections are directed upward away from the base mount using an adherent such as two-side tape so that it can be viewed using a video camera possessing an optical lens. The mount itself and any background behind the sample that will be viewed by the camera must be darkened using non-reflective black tape and black construction paper 346 (shown in
FIG. 25 ), respectively. For a typical sample, enough cross-sections should be cut and mounted separately from which a total of six projection height values can be determined. - An exemplary setup for acquiring the images is representatively illustrated in
FIG. 25 . Specifically, a CCD video camera 330 (e.g., aLeica DFC 310 FX video camera operated in gray scale mode is available from Leica Microsystems of Heerbrugg, Switzerland) is mounted on astandard support 332 such as a Polaroid MP-4 Land Camera standard support available from Polaroid Resource Center in Cambridge, Miss. or equivalent. Thestandard support 332 is attached to a macro-viewer 334 such as a KREONITE macro-viewer available from Dunning Photo Equipment, Inc., having an office in Bixby, Okla. Anauto stage 336 is placed on the upper surface of the macro-viewer 334. Theauto stage 336 is used to move the position of a given sample for viewing by thecamera 330. Asuitable auto stage 336 is a Model H112, available from Prior Scientific Inc., having an office in Rockland, Mass. - The
darkened sample mount 338 exposing the cross-sectioned sample face possessing land areas and projections is placed on theauto stage 336 under the optical axis of a 50mm Nikon lens 340 with an f-stop setting of 2.8. TheNikon lens 340 is attached to theLeica DFC 310FX camera 330 using a 30mm extension tube 342 and a c-mount adaptor. Thesample mount 338 is oriented so the sample cross-section faces flush toward thecamera 330 and runs in the horizontal direction of the resulting image with the projections directed upward away from the base mount. The cross-sectional face is illuminated with incident,incandescent lighting 344 provided by two, 150 watt, GE Reflector Flood lamps. The two flood lamps are positioned so that they provide more illumination to the cross-sectional face than to thesample mount 338 beneath it in the image. When viewed from overhead directly above thecamera 330 and underlyingsample cross-section mount 338, theflood lamps 344 will be positioned at approximately 30 degrees and 150 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane running thru thecamera 330. From this view the camera support will be at the 90 degree position. The illumination level of the lamps is controlled with a Variable Auto-transformer, type 3PN1010, available from Staco Energy Products Co. having an office in Dayton, Ohio. - The image analysis software platform used to perform measurements is a QWIN Pro (Version 3.5.1) available from Leica Microsystems, having an office in Heerbrugg, Switzerland. The system and images are also calibrated using the QWIN software and a standard ruler with metric markings at least as small as one millimeter. The calibration is performed in the horizontal dimension of the video camera image. Units of millimeters per pixel are used for the calibration.
- Thus, the method for determining projection heights of a given sample includes the step of performing several, dimensional measurements. Specifically, an image analysis algorithm is used to acquire and process images as well as perform measurements using Quantimet User Interactive Programming System (QUIPS) language. The image analysis algorithm is reproduced below.
-
NAME = Height - Projection vs Land Regions -1 PURPOSE = Measures height of projection and land regions DEFINE VARIABLES & OPEN FILES - The following line is set to designate where measurement data will be stored Open File (C:\Data\39291\Height\data.xls, channel #1) FIELDS = 6 SAMPLE ID AND SET UP Enter Results Header File Results Header (channel #1 ) File Line (channel #1) Measure frame (x 31, y 61, Width 1330, Height 978) Image frame (x 0, y 0, Width 1392, Height 1040) -- Calvalue = 0.0083 mm/pixel CALVALUE = 0.0083 Calibrate (CALVALUE CALUNITS$ per pixel) For ( REPLICATE = 1 to FIELDS, step 1 ) Clear Feature Histogram # 1Clear Feature Histogram #2 Clear Accepts IMAGE ACQUISITION AND DETECTION PauseText (″Position sample, focus image and set white level to 0.95.″) Image Setup DC Twain [PAUSE] ( Camera 1, AutoExposure Off, Gain 0.00,ExposureTime 200.00 msec, Brightness 0, Lamp 49.99) Acquire (into Image0 ) ACQOUTPUT = 0 -- The following line can be optionally set-up for saving image files to a specific location. ACQFILE$ = ″C:\lmages\39291 - for Height\Text. 2H_″+STR$(REPLICATE)+″s.jpg″ Write image (from ACQOUTPUT into file ACQFILE$) Detect (whiter than 104, from Image0 into Binary0 delineated ) IMAGE PROCESSING Binary Amend (Close from BinaryO to Bi nary 1, cycles 4, operator Disc, edge erode on) Binary Amend (Open from Binary 1 to Binary2, cycles 4, operator Disc, edge erode on)Binary Identify (FillHoles from Binary2 to Binary3) Binary Amend (Close from Binary3 to Binary4, cycles 15, operator Disc, edge erode on) Binary Amend (Open from Binary4 to Binary5, cycles 20, operator Disc, edge erode on) PauseText (″Fill in projection & land regions that should be included, and reject over detected regions.″) Binary Edit [PAUSE] ( Draw from Binary5 to Binary6, nib Fill, width 2) PauseText (″Select ′Land′ region for measurement.″) Binary Edit [PAUSE] (Accept from Binary6 to Binary7, nib Fill, width 2) PauseText (″Select ′Projection′ region for measurement.″) Binary Edit [PAUSE] (Accept from Binary6 to Binary8, nib Fill, width 2) -- Combine land and projection regions with measurement grid. Graphics ( Grid, 30 × 0 Lines, Grid Size 1334 × 964, Origin 21 × 21, Thickness 2, Orientation 0.000000, to Binaryl 5 Cleared ) Binary Logical (C = AANDB: C Binary10, A Binary7, B Binary15) Binary Logical (C = AANDB: C Binary11, A Binary8, B Binary15) MEASURE HEIGHTS -- Land region only Measure feature ( plane Binary10, 8 ferets, minimum area: 8, grey image: Image0) Selected parameters: X FCP, Y FCP, Feret90 Feature Histogram #1 (Y Param Number, X Param Feret90, from 0.0100 to 5., logarithmic, 20 bins) Display Feature Histogram Results (#1, horizontal, differential, bins + graph (Y axis linear), statistics) Data Window ( 12/8,412, 323, 3/1 ) -- Projection regions only (includes any underlying land material) Measure feature ( plane Binary11,8 ferets, minimum area: 8, grey image: Image0) Selected parameters: X FCP, Y FCP, Feret90 Feature Histogram #2 (Y Param Number, X Param Feret90, from 0.0100 to 10., logarithmic, 20 bins) Display Feature Histogram Results (#2, horizontal, differential, bins + graph (Y axis linear), statistics) Data Window ( 1305, 801,29/, 3/1 ) OUTPUT DATA File (″Land Height (mm)″, channel #1 ) File Line (channel #1 ) File Feature Histogram Results (#1, differential, statistics, bin details, channel #1 File Line (channel #1 ) File Line (channel #1 ) File (″Projection + Land Height (mm)″, channel #1 ) File Line (channel #1 ) File Feature Histogram Results (#2, differential, statistics, bin details, channel #1 File Line (channel #1 ) File Line (channel #1 ) File Line (channel #1 ) Next (REPLICATE) Close File (channel #1) END - The QUIPS algorithm is executed using the QWIN Pro software platform. The analyst is initially prompted to enter sample identification information which is sent to a designated EXCEL file to which the measurement data will also be subsequently sent.
- The analyst is then prompted to position the mounted sample cross-section on the auto-
stage 336 possessing the darkened background so the cross-sectional face is flush to thecamera 330 with projections directed upward and the length running horizontally in the live image displayed on the video monitor screen. The analyst next adjusts thevideo camera 330 and lens' 340 vertical position to optimize the focus of the cross-sectional face. The illumination level is also adjusted by the analyst via the Variable Auto-transformer to a white level reading of approximately 0.95. - Once the analyst completes the above steps and executes the continue command, an image will be acquired, detected and processed automatically by the QUIPS algorithm. The analyst will then be prompted to fill-in the detected binary image, using the computer mouse, of any projection and/or land areas shown in the cross-sectional image that should have been included by the previous detection and image processing steps as well as rejecting any over detected regions that go beyond the boundaries of the cross-sectional structure shown in the underlying gray-scale image. To aid in this editing process, the analyst can toggle the ‘control’ and ‘B’ keys on the keyboard simultaneously to turn the overlying binary image on and off to assess how closely the binary matches with the boundaries of the sample shown in the cross-section. If the initial cross-sectioning sample preparation was performed well, little if any manual editing should be required.
- The analyst is now prompted to “Select ‘Land’ region for measurement” using the computer mouse. This selection is performed by carefully drawing a vertical line down through one side of a single land area located between or adjacent to projections and then, with the left mouse button still depressed, moving the cursor beneath the land area to its opposite side and then drawing another vertical line upward. Once this has occurred, the left mouse button can be released and the land area to be measured should be filled in with a green coloring. If the vertical edges of the resulting selected region are skewed in any way, the analyst can reset to the original detected binary by clicking on the ‘Undo’ button located within the Binary Edit window and begin the selection process again until straight vertical edges on both sides of the selected land region are obtained.
- Similarly, the analyst will next be prompted to “Select ‘Projection’ region for measurement.” The top portion of a projection region adjacent to the previously selected land area is now selected in the same manner that was previously described for a land area selection.
- The algorithm will then automatically perform measurements on both selected regions and output the data, in histogram format, into the designated EXCEL spreadsheet file. In the EXCEL file, the histograms for land and projection regions will be labeled “Land Height (mm)” and “Projection+Land Height (mm),” respectively. A separate set of histograms will be generated for each selection of land and projection region pairs.
- The analyst will then again be prompted to position the sample and begin the process of selecting different land and projection regions. At this point, the analyst can either use the auto-stage joystick to move the same cross-section to a new sub-sampling position or an entirely different mounted cross-section obtained from the same sample can be positioned on the auto-
stage 306 for measurement. The process for positioning the sample and selecting land and projection regions for measurement will occur six times for each execution of the QUIPS algorithm. - A single projection height value is then determined by calculating the numerical difference between the mean values of the separate land and projection region histograms for each single pair of measurements. The QUIPS algorithm will provide six replicate measurement sets of both land and projection regions for a single sample so that six projection height values will be generated per sample. The final sample mean spread value is usually based on an N=6 analysis from six, separate subsample measurements. A comparison between different samples can be performed using a Student's T analysis at the 90% confidence level.
- In the interests of brevity and conciseness, any ranges of values set forth in this disclosure contemplate all values within the range and are to be construed as support for claims reciting any sub-ranges having endpoints which are whole number values within the specified range in question. By way of hypothetical example, a disclosure of a range of from 1 to 5 shall be considered to support claims to any of the following
ranges 1 to 5; 1 to 4; 1 to 3; 1 to 2; 2 to 5; 2 to 4; 2 to 3; 3 to 5; 3 to 4; and 4 to 5. - The dimensions and values disclosed herein are not to be understood as being strictly limited to the exact numerical values recited. Instead, unless otherwise specified, each such dimension is intended to mean both the recited value and a functionally equivalent range surrounding that value. For example, a dimension disclosed as “40 mm” is intended to mean “about 40 mm.”
- All documents cited in the Detailed Description are, in relevant part, incorporated herein by reference; the citation of any documents is not to be construed as an admission that it is prior art with respect to the present invention. To the extent that any meaning or definition of a term in this written document conflicts with any meaning or definition of the term in a document incorporated by reference, the meaning or definition assigned to the term in this written document shall govern.
- While particular embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and described, it would be obvious to those skilled in the art that various other changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. It is therefore intended to cover in the appended claims all such changes and modifications that are within the scope of this invention.
- When introducing elements of the present disclosure or the preferred embodiment(s) thereof, the articles “a”, “an”, “the” and “said” are intended to mean that there are one or more of the elements. The terms “comprising”, “including” and “having” are intended to be inclusive and mean that there may be additional elements other than the listed elements. Many modifications and variations of the present disclosure can be made without departing from the spirit and scope thereof. Therefore, the exemplary embodiments described above should not be used to limit the scope of the invention.
Claims (13)
1. An absorbent article comprising:
a) a longitudinal direction and a transverse direction;
b) a longitudinal centerline and a transverse centerline;
c) an anterior region, a posterior region, and a central region positioned between the anterior region and the posterior region;
d) an anterior region transverse direction end edge, a posterior region transverse direction end edge, and a pair of longitudinal direction side edges extending between and connecting the anterior region transverse direction end edge and the posterior region transverse direction end edge;
e) a topsheet layer defining a body facing surface of the absorbent article, a liquid impermeable layer defining a garment facing surface of the absorbent article, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet layer and the liquid impermeable layer; and
f) an exudate management layer in fluid communication with the topsheet layer; the exudate management layer comprising a first component at least partially defining an opening in the exudate management layer; and a second component connected to the first component via a primary fold, the second component extending from the primary fold in the longitudinal direction towards the posterior region of the absorbent article, wherein the opening is positioned between the transverse centerline and the posterior region transverse direction end edge.
2. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the exudate management layer is positioned on the body facing surface of the topsheet layer.
3. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the exudate management layer is positioned between the topsheet layer and the absorbent core.
4. The absorbent article of claim 1 further comprising an acquisition layer.
5. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the second component comprises a secondary fold.
6. The absorbent article of claim 1 further comprising a third component connected to the primary component of the exudate management layer via a third component primary fold.
7. The absorbent article of claim 6 wherein the third component extends from the third component primary fold in the longitudinal direction towards the anterior region of the absorbent article.
8. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the second component at least partially overlaps the first component.
9. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the second component at least partially underlaps the first component.
10. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the absorbent article further comprises an opposing pair of containment flaps extending in the longitudinal direction of the absorbent article.
11. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the topsheet layer is a fluid entangled laminate web comprising a support layer comprising a plurality of fibers and opposed first and second surfaces; a projection layer comprising a plurality of fibers and opposed inner and outer surfaces, the second surface of the support layer in contact with the inner surface of the projection layer, fibers of at least one of the support layer and the projection layer being fluid-entangled fibers of the other of the support layer and the projection layer; a plurality of hollow projections formed form a first plurality of the plurality of fibers in the projection layer, the plurality of hollow projections extending from the outer surface of the projection layer in a direction away from the support layer; and a land area, wherein the plurality of hollow projections are surrounded by the land area.
12. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the absorbent core comprises a body facing surface and projections extending away from the body facing surface of the absorbent core.
13. The absorbent article of claim 1 wherein the second component comprises at least one opening.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US18/107,144 US20230190544A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2023-02-08 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201762479861P | 2017-03-31 | 2017-03-31 | |
PCT/US2018/025102 WO2018183651A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-29 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
US201916492198A | 2019-09-09 | 2019-09-09 | |
US18/107,144 US20230190544A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2023-02-08 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
Related Parent Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/492,198 Continuation US11596561B2 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-29 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
PCT/US2018/025102 Continuation WO2018183651A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-29 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20230190544A1 true US20230190544A1 (en) | 2023-06-22 |
Family
ID=63676984
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/492,198 Active 2040-05-29 US11596561B2 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-29 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
US18/107,144 Pending US20230190544A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2023-02-08 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/492,198 Active 2040-05-29 US11596561B2 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-03-29 | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US11596561B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR102164776B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN110381902A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2018183651A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2018183672A1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-10-04 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
MX2019010203A (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2019-10-07 | Kimberly Clark Co | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer. |
WO2022051644A1 (en) * | 2020-09-04 | 2022-03-10 | Simplifyber, Inc. | Clothing item including at least one three-dimensional contour, and method of making the same |
US12121430B1 (en) * | 2023-11-28 | 2024-10-22 | Chi Chen HSIEN | Reusable diaper |
Citations (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2000040110A1 (en) * | 1999-01-07 | 2000-07-13 | Tohru Nakatani | Planar fastener |
US6595972B1 (en) * | 2000-05-26 | 2003-07-22 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Wearable article having a spacer maintaining a void space |
US20050113777A1 (en) * | 2003-11-20 | 2005-05-26 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | An Absorbent Article Such As A Sanitary Napkin, A Diaper, An Incontinence Guard Or A Panty-Liner |
US20060142723A1 (en) * | 2004-12-28 | 2006-06-29 | Uni-Charm Corporation | Sanitary napkin |
JP2006288550A (en) * | 2005-04-07 | 2006-10-26 | Japan Absorbent Technology Institute | Absorber article for female |
US20070088305A1 (en) * | 2005-10-14 | 2007-04-19 | Oji Nepia Co., Ltd. | Disposable diaper |
US20090204095A1 (en) * | 2008-02-13 | 2009-08-13 | Mcdaniel Mary Lou | Compound absorbent article with improved body contact |
US20120232514A1 (en) * | 2003-06-13 | 2012-09-13 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent structure having three-dimensional topography and method of making such an absorbent structure |
US20140121623A1 (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2014-05-01 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent Article |
TWM569218U (en) * | 2018-08-23 | 2018-11-01 | 戴吉良 | Anti-overflow isolation diaper |
Family Cites Families (181)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3167860A (en) | 1958-04-28 | 1965-02-02 | Besly Welles Corp | Method of contracting a hole |
US3157780A (en) | 1960-06-27 | 1964-11-17 | Ibm | Pulse train sensing circuitry |
US3182661A (en) * | 1962-10-05 | 1965-05-11 | Louis P Ribeiro | Sanitary garments for infants |
DE1492430A1 (en) * | 1965-02-12 | 1970-09-03 | ||
US3441024A (en) * | 1966-03-21 | 1969-04-29 | Harold J Ralph | Loin garment for absorbent pads |
US3532093A (en) * | 1968-04-22 | 1970-10-06 | Rose Lovret | Separable compartmented diaper construction |
US3658065A (en) * | 1969-07-14 | 1972-04-25 | Weck & Co Inc Edward | Bandage having an integral reservoir |
US4031897A (en) * | 1976-04-21 | 1977-06-28 | Adan Graetz | Collector for amniotic fluid |
FR2522521B1 (en) * | 1982-03-02 | 1987-04-17 | Beghin Say Sa | SINGLE USE ARTICLE FOR ABSORBING LIQUIDS |
US4605405A (en) | 1983-09-26 | 1986-08-12 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Dynamically moveable napkin |
US4631062A (en) | 1984-09-27 | 1986-12-23 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Labial sanitary pad |
US4846824A (en) | 1984-05-21 | 1989-07-11 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Labial sanitary pad |
AU568944B2 (en) * | 1984-08-02 | 1988-01-14 | Johnson & Johnson | Diaper with facing raised above absorbent pad |
US4743245A (en) | 1985-03-01 | 1988-05-10 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Labial sanitary pad |
US4673403A (en) | 1985-10-30 | 1987-06-16 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Method and pad allowing improved placement of catamenial device |
CA1294119C (en) * | 1985-11-04 | 1992-01-14 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having an expanding overwrap |
US4886509A (en) * | 1985-12-20 | 1989-12-12 | Lars Mattsson | Device for collecting and absorbing urine |
US4804380A (en) | 1987-08-06 | 1989-02-14 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Anatomically shaped, self-aligning, sanitary protection device |
US5733274A (en) * | 1988-03-31 | 1998-03-31 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Sanitary napkin having stiffened center |
US4988345A (en) * | 1988-05-24 | 1991-01-29 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent articles with rapid acquiring absorbent cores |
US4988344A (en) * | 1988-05-24 | 1991-01-29 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent articles with multiple layer absorbent layers |
US4968312A (en) * | 1988-06-03 | 1990-11-06 | Sarbuland Khan | Disposable fecal compartmenting diaper |
CA2029129C (en) * | 1989-11-03 | 2001-01-23 | Shmuel Dabi | Absorbent products having flexible, hydrophilic wick means |
US5849003A (en) | 1990-06-18 | 1998-12-15 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article fastener pattern |
AU645379B2 (en) * | 1990-10-29 | 1994-01-13 | Procter & Gamble Company, The | Sanitary napkin having components capable of separation in use |
US6171291B1 (en) | 1990-10-29 | 2001-01-09 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Generally thin, flexible, sanitary napkin with central absorbent hump |
US5591149A (en) * | 1992-10-07 | 1997-01-07 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having meltblown components |
JPH084020Y2 (en) * | 1991-04-10 | 1996-02-07 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
CA2053930C (en) * | 1991-07-17 | 1997-01-07 | Robert Emmet Kirby | Bodyside cover for an absorbent article |
US5662633A (en) * | 1991-07-23 | 1997-09-02 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having a window with a body-conforming acquisition element positioned therein |
GR1002279B (en) * | 1991-09-03 | 1996-05-02 | Mcneil-Ppc Inc. | Absorbent article having a deformation resisting apparatus. |
USD342785S (en) | 1991-10-09 | 1993-12-28 | Farrell Idonia C | Sanitary napkin |
US5681300A (en) * | 1991-12-17 | 1997-10-28 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having blended absorbent core |
WO1993011725A1 (en) * | 1991-12-17 | 1993-06-24 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having fused layers |
US5171236A (en) * | 1991-12-20 | 1992-12-15 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Disposable absorbent article having core spacers |
JPH05277149A (en) * | 1992-04-01 | 1993-10-26 | Uni Charm Corp | Disposable diaper |
JP3084121B2 (en) * | 1992-04-06 | 2000-09-04 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
JP3157598B2 (en) * | 1992-04-21 | 2001-04-16 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
JP3130365B2 (en) * | 1992-04-30 | 2001-01-31 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diaper having elastic opening in skin top sheet and method of forming the elastic opening |
WO1993025172A1 (en) * | 1992-06-12 | 1993-12-23 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Spacers for use in hygienic absorbent articles and disposable absorbent articles having such spacer |
MY114230A (en) | 1992-07-23 | 2002-09-30 | Procter & Gamble | Absorbent article having resilient center |
IT1257101B (en) * | 1992-09-16 | 1996-01-05 | Gianfranco Palumbo | ABSORBENT ITEM WITH CONTROLLED DISTRIBUTION OF THE LIQUID. |
US5306266A (en) * | 1992-12-21 | 1994-04-26 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Flexible spacers for use in disposable absorbent articles |
US5540671A (en) * | 1993-06-10 | 1996-07-30 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having a pocket cuff with an apex |
ES2120627T3 (en) * | 1993-06-23 | 1998-11-01 | Procter & Gamble | ABSORBENT DISPOSABLE ITEM WITH SELECTIVELY EXPANDABLE OR INFLATABLE COMPONENTS. |
US5330459A (en) * | 1993-06-23 | 1994-07-19 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Disposable absorbent article having an inflatable spacer |
ATE177308T1 (en) * | 1993-06-28 | 1999-03-15 | Procter & Gamble | ABSORBENT ARTICLE WITH CONTROLLED LIQUID DISTRIBUTION |
US5669896A (en) * | 1994-06-16 | 1997-09-23 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent garment comprising dual containment flaps |
US5507735A (en) | 1994-08-05 | 1996-04-16 | Kimberly-Clark Corporation | Absorbent article having moveable attachment means |
US5558660A (en) * | 1994-09-08 | 1996-09-24 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having a pocket cuff with a gluteal groove spacer |
US5853403A (en) * | 1994-10-25 | 1998-12-29 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with body contacting liquid control member |
US5554142A (en) * | 1994-11-30 | 1996-09-10 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having multiple effective height transverse partition |
US5514121A (en) * | 1994-12-09 | 1996-05-07 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Diaper having expulsive spacer |
US5954705A (en) * | 1995-06-13 | 1999-09-21 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article |
SE508206C2 (en) * | 1995-09-06 | 1998-09-14 | Moelnlycke Ab | Absorbent articles for absorbing body fluids |
DE19609462A1 (en) * | 1996-03-11 | 1997-09-18 | Kimberly Clark Gmbh | Absorbent article and method for the directed discharge of locally escaping fluids |
EP0902676B1 (en) * | 1996-05-28 | 2002-10-30 | Kao Corporation | Absorbent article with liquid shrinkable elements |
CN1121849C (en) * | 1996-06-04 | 2003-09-24 | 花王株式会社 | Absorbent article |
SE511903C2 (en) * | 1996-06-28 | 1999-12-13 | Sca Hygiene Prod Ab | Absorbent articles comprising an absorbent body with improved fluid inlet properties |
US5833677A (en) * | 1996-09-05 | 1998-11-10 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article having a containment dam |
JP3442943B2 (en) * | 1996-10-23 | 2003-09-02 | 花王株式会社 | Absorbent articles |
SE507798C2 (en) * | 1996-11-15 | 1998-07-13 | Moelnlycke Ab | Absorbent articles with raised part |
US6017336A (en) * | 1996-12-10 | 2000-01-25 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article having three dimensional longitudinal containment barriers |
JP3797746B2 (en) * | 1997-05-20 | 2006-07-19 | 花王株式会社 | Absorbent article, manufacturing method and manufacturing apparatus thereof |
SE509537C2 (en) * | 1997-06-24 | 1999-02-08 | Moelnlycke Ab | Absorbent articles with improved body contact |
JP3406205B2 (en) * | 1997-10-08 | 2003-05-12 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
US6022338A (en) * | 1997-11-19 | 2000-02-08 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article having a multilayered containment barrier |
JP3628883B2 (en) * | 1997-11-26 | 2005-03-16 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Flexible sheet used for disposable wearing article and method for producing the same |
JP3429656B2 (en) * | 1998-01-30 | 2003-07-22 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
US6264641B1 (en) * | 1998-05-07 | 2001-07-24 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Expandable cover garment |
JP3652505B2 (en) * | 1998-05-14 | 2005-05-25 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Sanitary napkin |
JP3492234B2 (en) * | 1998-05-29 | 2004-02-03 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable body fluid treatment article and method of manufacturing the same |
JP4485057B2 (en) * | 1998-06-29 | 2010-06-16 | ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー | Disposable absorbent body having a translation operation member |
JP3732339B2 (en) * | 1998-07-15 | 2006-01-05 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Sanitary napkin |
US6667424B1 (en) | 1998-10-02 | 2003-12-23 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent articles with nits and free-flowing particles |
US6716204B1 (en) * | 1998-10-28 | 2004-04-06 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article with improved feces containment characteristics |
WO2000037002A1 (en) * | 1998-12-22 | 2000-06-29 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article for wearing in supporting garment |
US6506185B1 (en) * | 1999-02-19 | 2003-01-14 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with a flap and spacer |
US7166095B1 (en) * | 1999-02-25 | 2007-01-23 | Tailored Technologies, Inc. | Protective undergarments having anchored pocketed-sling structures and manufacturing methods therefor |
US6376011B1 (en) | 1999-04-16 | 2002-04-23 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Process for preparing superabsorbent-containing composites |
US6409883B1 (en) | 1999-04-16 | 2002-06-25 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Methods of making fiber bundles and fibrous structures |
IT1307895B1 (en) * | 1999-04-30 | 2001-11-19 | Iolanda Calia | EXTERNAL ABSORBENT PARTICULARLY SUITABLE FOR PREVENTING THE MONTHLY FLOW TO PENETRATE BETWEEN THE BUTTOCKS. |
JP3691292B2 (en) * | 1999-06-29 | 2005-09-07 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable pad for stool processing |
US6375643B1 (en) | 1999-09-14 | 2002-04-23 | Kerry Moorhead | Urine/fecal collection undergarment |
JP3550056B2 (en) * | 1999-09-16 | 2004-08-04 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
US6492574B1 (en) * | 1999-10-01 | 2002-12-10 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Center-fill absorbent article with a wicking barrier and central rising member |
US6613955B1 (en) | 1999-10-01 | 2003-09-02 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent articles with wicking barrier cuffs |
US6486379B1 (en) * | 1999-10-01 | 2002-11-26 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with central pledget and deformation control |
ATE366562T1 (en) * | 1999-12-22 | 2007-08-15 | Procter & Gamble | ABSORBENT ITEM |
US6458110B1 (en) * | 2000-01-11 | 2002-10-01 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Disposable article having an expandable component |
US6365794B1 (en) | 2000-03-22 | 2002-04-02 | Mcneil-Ppc, Inc. | Microporous films comprising flocked fibers |
BR0112315A (en) * | 2000-06-29 | 2003-06-24 | Japan Absorbent Tech Inst | Absorbent product |
JP3734691B2 (en) * | 2000-07-21 | 2006-01-11 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
WO2002024130A1 (en) * | 2000-09-21 | 2002-03-28 | Japan Absorbent Technology Institute | Absorptive product having removable absorbers |
SE517857C2 (en) | 2000-10-02 | 2002-07-23 | Sca Hygiene Prod Ab | Absorbent article with leakage barriers containing spacers that create stable transverse channels |
JP3811001B2 (en) * | 2000-12-06 | 2006-08-16 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable wearing items |
JP3701864B2 (en) * | 2000-12-12 | 2005-10-05 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable wearing items |
JP3895921B2 (en) * | 2000-12-25 | 2007-03-22 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable excrement disposal article |
JP3964624B2 (en) * | 2001-01-23 | 2007-08-22 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
JP4017839B2 (en) * | 2001-02-23 | 2007-12-05 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Absorption product for sanitary use |
US7238175B2 (en) * | 2001-02-27 | 2007-07-03 | Uni-Charm Corporation | Disposable diaper |
US7056310B2 (en) * | 2001-04-24 | 2006-06-06 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Body fluid management device used with absorbent article |
JP4678632B2 (en) * | 2001-05-23 | 2011-04-27 | 王子製紙株式会社 | Absorber product with folded part |
JP3922895B2 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2007-05-30 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Sanitary napkin |
US7156832B2 (en) * | 2001-12-06 | 2007-01-02 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | Absorbent Article having a stiffening element and elongate through-hole |
US6726668B2 (en) * | 2001-12-14 | 2004-04-27 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Disposable absorbent article |
US7037298B2 (en) | 2001-12-20 | 2006-05-02 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Disposable absorbent article having a raised circumferential bank |
US7749208B2 (en) * | 2002-03-21 | 2010-07-06 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | Insert for absorbent article having a feces retaining layer and spacer element |
AU2002343821A1 (en) * | 2002-11-18 | 2004-06-15 | Uni-Charm Corporation | Absorbable article for mounting auxiliary pad |
CN1694664A (en) * | 2002-11-18 | 2005-11-09 | 尤妮佳股份有限公司 | Auxiliary sheet for absorbable article |
US7858841B2 (en) | 2002-12-11 | 2010-12-28 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Enhanced body conformance with the use of free flowing particles |
US7056312B1 (en) * | 2003-06-17 | 2006-06-06 | Metcalf Regina L | Sanitary napkin with absorbent tab |
SE0303066D0 (en) | 2003-11-20 | 2003-11-20 | Sca Hygiene Prod Ab | An absorbent article such as a sanitary napkin, a diaper, an incontinence cover or a panty cover |
US20050131369A1 (en) * | 2003-12-11 | 2005-06-16 | Lotion Puff, Inc. | Sanitary napkin |
US20050148960A1 (en) * | 2003-12-18 | 2005-07-07 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent pad with three-dimensional end containment |
US7160280B2 (en) * | 2004-02-13 | 2007-01-09 | Brenda Lee Bailey | Diaper with segregated reservoir |
JP4532966B2 (en) * | 2004-04-07 | 2010-08-25 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Continuous production method for disposable diapers |
JP4473031B2 (en) * | 2004-04-09 | 2010-06-02 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
JP4473032B2 (en) * | 2004-04-12 | 2010-06-02 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable wearing items |
JP4738754B2 (en) | 2004-04-15 | 2011-08-03 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Sanitary napkin |
JP4143041B2 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2008-09-03 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Wearing article |
JP4526360B2 (en) * | 2004-11-25 | 2010-08-18 | 株式会社リブドゥコーポレーション | Disposable diapers |
JP4771756B2 (en) * | 2005-06-17 | 2011-09-14 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Absorbent articles |
US10123920B2 (en) * | 2005-08-19 | 2018-11-13 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article having asymmetric absorbent core component |
EP1776940B1 (en) * | 2005-09-23 | 2012-06-06 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Apertured liquid acquisition dual layer |
EP1767177B1 (en) * | 2005-09-23 | 2016-06-15 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Apertured liquid acquisition layer with caliper recovery |
JP3914555B2 (en) * | 2005-10-14 | 2007-05-16 | 王子ネピア株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
WO2008002220A1 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2008-01-03 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | Top layer for an absorbent article |
RU2406475C2 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2010-12-20 | Ска Хайджин Продактс Аб | Upper layer for absorbent product |
EP1958601A1 (en) | 2007-02-13 | 2008-08-20 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Absorbent article comprising an ink composition |
US20090088716A1 (en) | 2007-10-01 | 2009-04-02 | Oriyomi Nwokeji | Article for absorption of human exudate |
CN101868208B (en) * | 2007-11-20 | 2013-08-14 | Sca卫生用品公司 | Shaped absorbent article |
US8324445B2 (en) * | 2008-06-30 | 2012-12-04 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Collection pouches in absorbent articles |
US7967801B2 (en) | 2008-08-08 | 2011-06-28 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Regionalized topsheet |
US8882735B2 (en) * | 2008-12-16 | 2014-11-11 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Article with fluid-activated barriers |
US20100225215A1 (en) | 2009-03-03 | 2010-09-09 | Han-Ming Lee | Multi-chip cup semi-conductor lamp |
US8764719B2 (en) * | 2009-09-04 | 2014-07-01 | Johnson & Johnson Ind. E Com. Ltda | Absorbent article including an absorbent core layer having a material free zone and a transfer layer arranged below the absorbent core layer |
KR101651675B1 (en) * | 2009-10-30 | 2016-08-29 | 유한킴벌리 주식회사 | Absorbent article with annular absorbent member |
US8383227B2 (en) | 2010-01-28 | 2013-02-26 | Tredegar Film Products Corporation | Transfer layer for absorbent article |
JP5782251B2 (en) * | 2010-11-30 | 2015-09-24 | 大王製紙株式会社 | Absorbent articles |
US8708988B2 (en) | 2010-12-03 | 2014-04-29 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article configured for controlled deformation |
JP5734058B2 (en) * | 2011-04-01 | 2015-06-10 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Disposable diapers |
US9724245B2 (en) * | 2011-04-26 | 2017-08-08 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Formed web comprising chads |
US9044356B2 (en) * | 2011-05-19 | 2015-06-02 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article having enhanced leakage protection |
CA2834766C (en) * | 2011-06-28 | 2019-06-18 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | Absorbent article having intake structure |
US8870842B2 (en) | 2011-08-23 | 2014-10-28 | Gretchel Linelia Hill | Sanitary pad |
US8915898B2 (en) | 2012-03-05 | 2014-12-23 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with recessed body conforming structure |
US8915899B2 (en) | 2012-03-05 | 2014-12-23 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with raised body conforming structure |
US9649233B2 (en) * | 2012-04-25 | 2017-05-16 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent personal care articles having longitudinally oriented layers in discrete portions |
US9480608B2 (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2016-11-01 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with a fluid-entangled body facing material including a plurality of hollow projections |
US9327473B2 (en) | 2012-10-31 | 2016-05-03 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Fluid-entangled laminate webs having hollow projections and a process and apparatus for making the same |
JP5794970B2 (en) * | 2012-11-08 | 2015-10-14 | 株式会社ユニケア | Diaper unit and diaper exterior |
JP6050659B2 (en) * | 2012-11-16 | 2016-12-21 | 花王株式会社 | Absorbent articles |
US10213347B2 (en) | 2012-12-04 | 2019-02-26 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with an apertured multi-layered topsheet |
GB2508619A (en) * | 2012-12-05 | 2014-06-11 | Concepts For Success C4S | Absorbent article with split core and passageway |
US9808382B2 (en) | 2012-12-28 | 2017-11-07 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | Absorbent article having fluid flow control member |
US9675498B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2017-06-13 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with non-uniform dimensioned side barriers |
US10258516B2 (en) | 2013-07-31 | 2019-04-16 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Treated three-dimensional apertured liners |
CN105530901A (en) * | 2013-09-10 | 2016-04-27 | 宝洁公司 | Absorbent articles comprising auxetic cell forming structures |
US9237975B2 (en) * | 2013-09-27 | 2016-01-19 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with side barriers and decolorizing agents |
US9314382B2 (en) | 2013-11-12 | 2016-04-19 | Zilm-Rhomax Products, Llc | Incontinence pad |
BR112016011894B1 (en) | 2013-12-03 | 2021-06-22 | Essity Hygiene And Health Aktiebolag | ABSORBENT ARTICLE |
JP5669976B1 (en) | 2014-06-30 | 2015-02-18 | ユニ・チャーム株式会社 | Absorbent article and wearing article comprising the absorbent article |
US10667960B2 (en) * | 2014-09-29 | 2020-06-02 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with an absorbent system having an annular opening |
MX2017004878A (en) * | 2014-10-30 | 2017-07-05 | Kimberly Clark Co | Absorbent article with body conforming structure. |
BR112017013213B1 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2022-02-15 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc | ABSORBENT ARTICLE WITH HIGH TOP LEAF LAYER IN CONTACT WITH THE SKIN |
US10765566B2 (en) * | 2014-12-30 | 2020-09-08 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with partially separable, skin-contacting topsheet layer |
WO2016183709A1 (en) * | 2015-05-15 | 2016-11-24 | Kimberly-Clark (China) Co. Ltd. | Absorbent article with contoured fit |
US10406039B2 (en) * | 2015-05-26 | 2019-09-10 | Vivian Louise Villarreal | Male incontinence pad |
RU2653484C1 (en) * | 2015-06-29 | 2018-05-08 | Кимберли-Кларк Ворлдвайд, Инк. | Absorbent product with partially covering sealing element for the waist and way of its manufacture |
CN105232235A (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2016-01-13 | 浙江优全护理用品科技有限公司 | Paper diaper capable of rapidly absorbing liquid and keeping dry |
DE112017000415T5 (en) * | 2016-02-29 | 2018-10-11 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | ABSORPTION ITEMS WITH FLAT BACK PROTECTION FEATURE |
WO2017151093A1 (en) * | 2016-02-29 | 2017-09-08 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with channel |
BR112018016123B1 (en) * | 2016-02-29 | 2023-03-28 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc | ABSORBENT ARTICLE |
GB2564816B8 (en) * | 2016-04-29 | 2023-05-17 | Kimberly Clark Co | Absorbent article |
WO2018182601A1 (en) | 2017-03-30 | 2018-10-04 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Incorporation of apertured area into an absorbent article |
MX2019010203A (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2019-10-07 | Kimberly Clark Co | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer. |
WO2018183605A1 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2018-10-04 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Thong-style absorbent article |
WO2018183672A1 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2018-10-04 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer |
MX2020008945A (en) * | 2018-03-29 | 2022-04-11 | Kimberly Clark Co | Method of manufacturing an exudate management layer for use in an absorbent article. |
US11152294B2 (en) * | 2018-04-09 | 2021-10-19 | Corning Incorporated | Hermetic metallized via with improved reliability |
-
2018
- 2018-03-29 WO PCT/US2018/025102 patent/WO2018183651A1/en active Application Filing
- 2018-03-29 CN CN201880015779.0A patent/CN110381902A/en active Pending
- 2018-03-29 KR KR1020197029690A patent/KR102164776B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2018-03-29 US US16/492,198 patent/US11596561B2/en active Active
-
2023
- 2023-02-08 US US18/107,144 patent/US20230190544A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2000040110A1 (en) * | 1999-01-07 | 2000-07-13 | Tohru Nakatani | Planar fastener |
US6595972B1 (en) * | 2000-05-26 | 2003-07-22 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Wearable article having a spacer maintaining a void space |
US20120232514A1 (en) * | 2003-06-13 | 2012-09-13 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent structure having three-dimensional topography and method of making such an absorbent structure |
US20050113777A1 (en) * | 2003-11-20 | 2005-05-26 | Sca Hygiene Products Ab | An Absorbent Article Such As A Sanitary Napkin, A Diaper, An Incontinence Guard Or A Panty-Liner |
US20060142723A1 (en) * | 2004-12-28 | 2006-06-29 | Uni-Charm Corporation | Sanitary napkin |
JP2006288550A (en) * | 2005-04-07 | 2006-10-26 | Japan Absorbent Technology Institute | Absorber article for female |
US20070088305A1 (en) * | 2005-10-14 | 2007-04-19 | Oji Nepia Co., Ltd. | Disposable diaper |
US20090204095A1 (en) * | 2008-02-13 | 2009-08-13 | Mcdaniel Mary Lou | Compound absorbent article with improved body contact |
US20140121623A1 (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2014-05-01 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Absorbent Article |
TWM569218U (en) * | 2018-08-23 | 2018-11-01 | 戴吉良 | Anti-overflow isolation diaper |
Non-Patent Citations (3)
Title |
---|
Machine Translation of JP-2006288550-A, 10/2006 (Year: 2006) * |
Machine Translation of TW-M569218-U, 11/2018 (Year: 2018) * |
Machine Translation of WO-0040110-A1, 07/2000 (Year: 2000) * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
KR102164776B1 (en) | 2020-10-13 |
WO2018183651A1 (en) | 2018-10-04 |
KR20190119163A (en) | 2019-10-21 |
US20210137753A1 (en) | 2021-05-13 |
BR112019017717A2 (en) | 2020-03-31 |
CN110381902A (en) | 2019-10-25 |
US11596561B2 (en) | 2023-03-07 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US12029633B2 (en) | Absorbent article with a fluid entangled body facing material including a plurality of projections | |
US11969322B2 (en) | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer | |
US20230190544A1 (en) | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer | |
US9480608B2 (en) | Absorbent article with a fluid-entangled body facing material including a plurality of hollow projections | |
US20140121625A1 (en) | Absorbent Article | |
US20140121621A1 (en) | Absorbent Article | |
US11771605B2 (en) | Absorbent article with an exudate management layer | |
US12097140B2 (en) | Method of manufacturing an exudate management layer for use in an absorbent article | |
US11033438B2 (en) | Method of manufacturing an exudate management layer for use in an absorbent article | |
US20140154459A1 (en) | Fluid-Entangled Laminate Webs Having Hollow Projections and a Process and Apparatus for Making the Same | |
US20210030601A1 (en) | Method of manufacturing an exudate management layer for use in an absorbent article | |
BR112019017717B1 (en) | ABSORBENT ARTICLE | |
BR112019018360B1 (en) | ABSORBENT ARTICLE |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |